JP7400859B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is advantageous. There are bonus games that are executed. In such a configuration, a gaming machine has been proposed that provides a plurality of types of bonus games by controlling the opening and closing of two ball entrances .

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-265765

However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes: a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter; a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means; a determining means capable of executing a first determination based on the ball entering the ball means and a second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means; The first identification information for indicating the first discrimination result, which is the discrimination result of the first discrimination, and the second identification information, for indicating the second discrimination result, which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, are respectively displayed on the display means. a dynamic display means capable of displaying a specific first discrimination result; A second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game when a first privilege game is executed and second identification information for indicating a specific second discrimination result is displayed as the second discrimination result. a bonus game execution means capable of executing a game, and the second identification information for indicating that the second determination result is the specific second determination result is displayed on the display means. A specific ball entry means that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the ball, a specific area into which the game ball that enters the specific ball entry means can enter, and a case where the game ball enters the specific area. a bonus granting means for granting benefits advantageous to the player; and a predetermined number of times based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means when the second identification information is dynamically displayed. a first state in which the execution right is more likely to be stored in the storage means; and a first state in which the execution right is more likely to be stored than in the first state. a state setting means capable of switching and setting a second state in which the game ball is difficult to enter; and a state setting means that delays the entrance interval of the game ball to an interval equal to or more than the first interval when the game ball enters the second ball entrance means. and a delay means capable of causing the game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and when a specific condition is satisfied, the determination result of the second determination becomes the specific second determination result. means capable of displaying expectation information on the display means for indicating the expectation level for the game machine, and the gaming machine has a period in which a game ball can enter the specific ball entry means. In this case, the game ball is configured to be able to reach the delay means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a second ball entering means capable of entering the game ball into the first ball entering means. A determining means capable of performing a first determination based on the ball and a second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, and a determination of the first determination by the determining means The first identification information for indicating the first discrimination result, which is a result, and the second identification information, for indicating the second discrimination result, which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination, may be dynamically displayed on the display means. executing a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player when a possible dynamic display means and first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result are displayed on the display means as the first determination result; and executing a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game when second identification information indicating a specific second determination result is displayed as the second determination result. a bonus game execution means capable of A specific ball entering means that makes it easy for a ball to enter, a specific area into which a game ball that enters the specific ball entering means can enter, and a system that provides information to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. a bonus granting means for granting an advantageous benefit; and a determining means for a predetermined number of times based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entrance means when the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A storage means capable of storing the execution right of the second determination, a first state in which the execution right is easily stored in the storage means, and a second state in which the execution right is more difficult to be stored in the storage means. a state setting means capable of switching and setting the state; and a state setting means capable of delaying the entrance interval of the game ball to an interval equal to or more than the first interval when the game ball enters the second ball entrance means. Delay means and a game ball enters the second ball entry means, and when a specific condition is met, the second determination result indicates the expectation that the second determination result will be the specific second determination result. means capable of displaying expectation level information for the game on the display means; The game ball is configured to be able to reach the delay means.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in a third symbol display device. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in a third symbol display device. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in a third symbol display device. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in a third symbol display device. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st variable prize winning device. (a) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device along La-La, (b) is a sectional view along Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device. (a) to (b) are rear views of a part of the first variable winning device. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the relationship between the stop timing of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (a) and (b) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the stop timing of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fusion effect selection table in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a work RAM of the display control device. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed special figure 1 forced stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing special symbol 1 small hit stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. (a) is a flowchart showing special drawing 2 forced stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing special drawing 2 small hit stopping processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing a small winning operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the small winning ending process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize winning process performed by MPU in a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing special figure 1 fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing special figure 2 fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variation time measurement process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart showing jackpot related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 3 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing fusion effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is. (a) is a flowchart showing V winning effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in a display control device. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hit fluctuation pattern selection table provided in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) to (c) are audio data in the second embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the lamp control device. It is a flow chart showing special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the third embodiment. (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a small winning type selection table in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. (a) to (e) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a rear image provided in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the detail of a selection table, (c) is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol 1 small hit stop processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation start process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 small hit stop processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing rear image changing processing executed by the MPU of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th embodiment. It is an enlarged perspective view of the clone provided in the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in a third symbol display device in a fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing an outline of various counters in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation start process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th embodiment. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing details of various tables provided in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in a main control device in a fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing small hit control processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the sixth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are the diagrams provided in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of various tables. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit ending processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed SP reach selection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in a modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the audio lamp control device in the modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM. (a) is a judgment value calculation pattern table provided in the RAM of the audio lamp control device in a modified example of the third embodiment, and (b) to (d) are audio in the modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a back image selection table provided in a RAM in the lamp control device. 12 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modification of the third embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing rear image changing processing 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modified example of the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a pattern selection table after the jackpot is provided in the ROM of the main controller in a modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in an example. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in a modification of the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in a modification of the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in a modification of the fourth embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 73, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 11). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 50 and is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball extraction lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (a movable member 310 is shown, and other parts are (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning hole 63, first winning hole 64a, second winning hole 64b, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, normal symbol starting hole (through gate ) 67, variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures disposed on the rear side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64a, the second winning hole 64b, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like. The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 11) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64a or the second winning hole 64b. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64a, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 64b, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate. In addition, in this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37A and the second symbol display device 37B are configured to be able to operate (variably) simultaneously, and display the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time. It is configured to be able to notify the player (simultaneously display the information in a variable manner).

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64a and the second winning hole 64b. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R jackpot (jackpot A) is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. . Here, the "15R jackpot (jackpot A)" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the open flat door of the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state, and the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. This is a jackpot in which a maximum of 15 jackpot rounds are executed in which it is possible to enter the ball.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the jackpot lottery that is triggered by a winning in the first winning hole 64a or the second winning hole 64b, it is determined that it is a small win. If it is determined to be a small hit, the type of the small hit is determined. As the small winning type determined here, small winning A, small winning B, and small winning C are set as small winnings based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64a. In addition, a small win D is set as a small win based on the ball entering the second winning hole 64b. If the result of the lottery is a small win, a symbol corresponding to the small win type is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B as a stop symbol after the variation ends.

Here, "small win A" is a small win in which the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds, and is a small win in which the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened and closed twice at maximum. . "Small win B", "Small win C", and "Small win D" are also small wins with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, but each period during which the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened ( time) are configured differently. The details will be described later, but it is set so that whether or not it becomes possible to win a prize is set to vary depending on the type of small win.

Specifically, in small winnings A to D, the switching member 65h rotates downward for 2 seconds from the start of the small winning game, the guiding piece 65h2 rotates downward, and the special discharge port 65e2 The flow path to is in an open state. In "small win A", the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened/closed twice for 1 second 2 seconds after the start of the small winning game, and in "small winning B", the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened/closed 2 seconds after the start of the small winning game. The opening/closing door 65f1 is opened/closed twice for 1 second, and in "small win C", the door 65f1 is opened/closed twice for 1 second 2 seconds after the start of the small win game. On the other hand, in "Small win D", the opening/closing operation is performed twice for 1 second from the start of the small win game (immediately after the start of the small win game).

That is, in small winnings A to small winnings C, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened two seconds after the start of the small winning game, so when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened, the switching member 65h has already transferred the game to the normal discharge port 65e1. The state is switched to a state in which the ball is guided (see FIG. 10(b)) (hereinafter referred to as the normal guidance state), and the game ball enters the first variable winning device 65 in small wins A to small wins C. Also, it is configured to make it difficult to pass the game ball to the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, small wins A to C are set as small wins that are disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the small win D, since the door 65f1 is opened from the start of the small win game, the game ball entering the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the V winning switch 65e3. In this way, the switching member 65h is operated at the same timing from the start of the small winning game, regardless of the small winning type. On the other hand, by configuring the opening timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 to be different depending on the type of small win, there will be a small win D that is advantageous to the player and a small win A to small win C that is disadvantageous to the player. are set respectively. With this configuration, it is possible to easily control the operation of the switching member 65h. Further, since the operating timing of the switching member 65h is constant regardless of the type of small win, the player can expect the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, the small win D is set to be a small win that is advantageous to the player. In this embodiment, it is possible to win the small win D only with the second special symbol, so for the player, the second winning hole 64b is an advantageous winning hole, and the first winning hole 64a is a disadvantageous winning hole. It is set as a winning opening.

Here, in each small winning game, a display mode (in-round display mode) indicating that the small winning game is in progress is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small winning game. Specifically, the third symbol display device 81 displays the words "Hit it right!!" and the player is instructed to play a game in which the game ball is fired so that it passes on the right side of the variable display unit 80. An announcement will be made to encourage you to do so. Then, the text "Get a jackpot with V winning!!" is also displayed, and if the game ball can be passed through the V winning switch 65e3, it is a jackpot game (a game in which the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state (jackpot A)) ) will be started after this small winning game, the player is informed. The display mode displayed during the small winning game is displayed 3 seconds before the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened in each small winning game, and the game ball enters at the timing when the opening/closing door 65f1 opens. Now is the time to be able to play the ball. As a result, the player can recognize that the start of the small winning game is the timing when the display mode of the small winning game is started on the third symbol display device 81, and in each small winning, the small winning game is displayed. Since the period from when the mode is displayed to when the opening/closing door 65f1 becomes open is constant at 3 seconds, it is difficult to recognize that the opening timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 differs depending on the type of small win. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the small winning type from being determined at the opening timing of the opening/closing door 65f1. Therefore, when a small winning game is started, there is an effect that the game ball can be expected to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 regardless of the small winning type.

In addition, for each small win (small win A to C), a variation pattern table (see FIG. 16) is set when the second special symbol is missed, which is set after the end of the small win game. Specifically, when the small winning game of "small winning A" ends, the special drawing 2 losing variation pattern table 1 (state A) is set (see FIG. 16(b)). When the small winning game of "Small winning B" is completed, the special figure 2 missing variation pattern table 2 (state B) is set (see FIG. 16(c)). When the small winning game of "Small winning C" ends, the special figure 2 missing variation pattern table 3 (state C) is set (see FIG. 16(d)). The details of each variation pattern table will be described later, but each variation pattern table is configured to vary the variation time that is likely to be selected. Therefore, the variable time (dynamic display time) selected by the second special symbol can be varied depending on the small winning type of the first special symbol. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being changed at the same time, the second special symbol stops first, so that the lottery result of the second special symbol is changed. If the small win is D, the small win game of the small win D is executed. On the other hand, when the first special symbol stops first, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol that is changing is a small win D, it is forcibly stopped as a loss. Therefore, when the variation time of the second special symbol is more likely to be selected to be shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, it can be said that an advantageous state for the player is set. Therefore, by setting a variation pattern table in which a short variation time is likely to be selected depending on the type of small win based on the first special symbol, an advantageous situation can be set for the player. Therefore, by variably setting the variable pattern table, the conditions advantageous to the player can also be varied, and the player can be provided not only with a jackpot but also with the pleasure of predicting the type of variable pattern table.

In this embodiment, the structure is configured such that the state does not shift to the high probability state or the time saving state (electric support state) after the end of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Good too. Here, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, a state in which the probability is fluctuating (probability variation).In other words, it is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of the game. The high probability state (during probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 64b. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 64b. Refers to the state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second prize opening 64b is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. Set. When the electric accessory 64b1 is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 64b compared to when the electric accessory 64b1 is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 64b, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second prize opening 64b, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory object 64b1 is released than usual. In addition, during probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 64b1 is released at the time when the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning hole 64b is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning hole 64b is released or the number of times the electric accessory 64b1 is released in one win are not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in the first winning hole 64a and the second winning hole 64b. A third symbol display device 81 is configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a “display device”) that displays a variable display, and a second symbol is displayed in a variable manner using the passing of a ball in a normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) comprising an LED is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64a (starting winning), the first special symbol is changed in the first symbol display device 37 using this as a trigger. Further, when a ball enters the second winning hole 65b (starting winning), this is used as a trigger to execute a variation of the second special symbol in the first symbol display device 37. Furthermore, the third symbol display device 81 displays the special symbol (in the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed together) in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the third symbol (referred to as a special symbol) is performed. In addition, as for the third symbol, a dedicated symbol is variably displayed for each variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Note that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time.

Since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed variably at the same time, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is configured such that the first special symbol is always in the process of variation. Details of this configuration will be described later.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that the third symbol (○×) is displayed as the first special symbol. , are displayed for each of the second special symbols. Further, a fusion effect indicating whether or not the small win D advantageous to the player has been won is displayed in a display area larger than the third symbol. The details will be described later, but when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win D, the display mode indicating whether or not the second special symbol stops before the first special symbol is a rabbit and a turtle. Players are notified in a display format that resembles a competition. If the tortoise beats the hare, it means winning the small prize D.

In addition, in this embodiment, the turtle wins only when the small win D is won, but the camera is not limited to this, and also when the small win A to C based on the first special symbol is executed. As a configuration in which a winning performance may be executed, the player may be given the pleasure of seeing if he or she can make the game ball enter the V winning switch 67e3 through the subsequent small winning game. Further, the competition result between the rabbit and the turtle may not be displayed when a small hit is won, and the turtle's victory may be determined by the game ball entering the V winning switch 65e3. With this configuration, the player can enjoy the small winning game even more.

As for the third symbol, as shown in FIG. 4(a), a first display area Ds1 in which a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed is set at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, and a first display area Ds1 is set on the right side. A second display area Ds2 is set below in which a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. In both the first display area Ds1 and the second display area, "○×" symbols are displayed in two rows in parallel, and if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, "○○" is displayed. If it is a small hit, "○×" is displayed, and if it is a loss, "XX" is displayed. During the variable display, "○" symbols and "x" symbols in each column are displayed alternately at high speed.

In addition to the third symbol and fusion effect, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 displays character symbols, letters, etc. as a preview display mode that is displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. be done. Further, if no game is played for a predetermined period of time, a standby display image such as the model name of the pachinko machine 10 and a digest of the reach display mode is displayed.

A second symbol display device (not shown) displays an "O" symbol and an " ” symbol is alternately lit for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 64b1 attached to the second winning hole 64b is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only when the

The normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is assembled at a position above the first winning opening 64a in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and all game balls that enter the first winning opening 64a The ball is normally configured to enter the ball after passing through a symbol starting port (through gate) 67. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not suspended. Therefore, only when the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 when the variation of the normal symbol has stopped, the winning lottery for the second symbol is performed and the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is started. Ru.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to 0 times, but may be set to 1 or more times (for example, 4 times). Further, the number of normal symbol starting ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the lower part of the variable display unit 80, but may be on the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At a position below the variable display unit 80 and below the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a first winning opening 64a through which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball enters the first winning port 64a, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 11), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64a when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 64b in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 64b, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning port switch. (See FIG. 11), a jackpot lottery is made, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

As shown in FIG. 2, the second winning hole 64b is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning hole 64a. The second winning hole 64b is a position where a game ball that does not win in the first winning hole 64a can enter after passing through the left side of the variable display unit 80, or a game ball that has passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80. It is placed in a position where the ball can enter. In addition, a normal electric accessory 64b1 configured in a bow shape that can block the ball entry hole of the second winning hole 64b is placed above the second winning hole 64b, and is always shown in FIG. As shown, the game ball is placed in a position that restricts (does not allow) entry of the game ball into the second starting port 64a, and when a normal symbol hits, it rotates counterclockwise approximately 90 degrees and returns to the second starting port 64a. The normal electric accessory 64b1 guides the game ball to the winning opening 64b, and the game ball enters the second winning opening 64b (hereinafter referred to as the open state).

Here, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a variation time of 0.5 seconds or 1 second is selected as the variation time of the normal symbol. After the variable time, if the normal symbol is a hit, the normal electric accessory 64b1 changes to the open state for 0.5 seconds. That is, after the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the period during which the game ball can pass through the second prize opening 64b is from 0.5 seconds to 1 second after the game ball passes through the through gate 67. (When the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds) or 1 second to 1.5 seconds after the game ball passes through the through gate 67 (When the normal symbol fluctuation time is 1 second) There are cases. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to always enter the first prize opening 64a after that, and the game ball has passed through the through gate 67 and entered the first prize opening 64a. The period until it is detected by the detection switch (not shown) that detects it is about 0.2 seconds, so after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the game ball is placed in the second starting port 64b. The period during which the ball can be entered is from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the game ball enters the first winning hole 64a (if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds) ), the period is from 0.8 seconds to 1.3 seconds. In other words, the timing at which the second special symbol begins to fluctuate is either from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the first special symbol begins to fluctuate, or from 0.8 seconds to 1.3 seconds after the first special symbol begins to fluctuate. There are two types of periods until the end. Therefore, even if the timing at which the variation of the second special symbol starts is the latest, it is configured to be 1.3 seconds after the start of variation of the first special symbol.

In this embodiment, if the judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit (in this embodiment, in the lottery at the start of the variation, all lottery results other than the jackpot are small wins), the variation with the shortest variation time Even if it is a pattern, it is 5 seconds, and it is configured such that the first special symbol is always changing when the second special symbol starts changing. In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery at the start of the variation of the second special symbol is also a small win other than the jackpot, and there are fluctuations in which the lottery results are small wins for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. At the same time, it is configured to be easily variable. However, if they are fluctuating at the same time, the special symbol that has stopped fluctuating first is executed as a small hit, and one of the special symbols is forcibly stopped as a result of the determination that it is a miss. Therefore, when a small hit occurs with the second special symbol, the small win D is always executed, which is advantageous for the player, but the remaining fluctuation of the first special symbol at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol If the time is shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected by the second special symbol, the small winning D that is being drawn will be forcibly stopped as a loss, and the small winning D that is drawn will be forcibly stopped, and the small winning that is advantageous to the player will be stopped. It is configured so that win D is not executed.

In addition, the first winning hole 64a (first special symbol) and the second starting hole 64 (second special symbol) are configured such that no reserved balls are stored, so the game can be played continuously in the second winning hole 64b. Even if two balls enter the ball, the problem of the second special symbol varying independently can be suppressed.

Further, the first winning hole 64a and the second winning hole 64b each serve as one of the winning holes from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64a and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 64b are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64a and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 64b are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64a. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 64b may be five.

The probability of a jackpot and the probability of a small win are the same when a ball enters the first winning port 64a and when a ball enters the second winning port 64b (see FIG. 14(b)). However, the small winning type selected in the case of a small winning is determined by the first variable winning device 65 when the ball enters the second winning opening 64b than when the ball enters the first winning opening 64a. It is configured such that the small win D, in which the game ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3, is selected. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to win a small prize in the second winning hole 64b.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the second winning hole 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a small win is determined in a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64a or the second winning hole 64b, a variable time selected based on the determination result is determined. When a special symbol starts to change and is stopped and displayed before the other special symbol, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that it becomes a stop symbol for a small hit, and the small The occurrence of a small hit is indicated by displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the hit on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (small win) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened twice in an opening time of 1 second at the opening timing according to the small winning type already mentioned above.

A second variable winning device 650 is provided above the first variable winning device 65. Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a, and a large opening solenoid ( (not shown). The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, and the tilted opening/closing plate receives the game ball flowing down the front of the game board, so that the ball is sent to the second special winning opening 650a. It operates by temporarily forming an open state in which it is easy to win a prize, and alternately repeating the open state and the normal closed state.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning slot 64a or the second winning slot 64b becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot is announced. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or 37B so as to display the stop symbol, and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the second variable prize winning device 65 becomes open due to the jackpot game. This open state is continued until 10 game balls enter the second specific winning hole 650a or 30 seconds have elapsed, and then it is closed. After this operation is repeated for 15 rounds, the jackpot game ends. Although details will be described later, a jackpot also occurs when a game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 650 described above. Thereafter, the game state changes to a jackpot game state (special game state) in which it is easy to win a ball.

Note that the jackpot game state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64a or the first The position is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64a, but may be placed to the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged. In this embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a device used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to resolve the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 11), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<About the first variable winning device in the first embodiment>
Details of the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of this first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 8, the first variable winning device 65 includes an opening forming member 65b that is arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and a first variable winning device that is combined with the back side of the opening forming member 65b. A base member 65c for fixing the winning device 65 to the game board 13 with screws, and an LED arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to light the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. An LED board 65d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening/closing mechanism for opening and closing a specific prize opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. An opening/closing unit 65f having a door 65f1, a channel cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a channel, and a channel formed by the back cover body 65e and the channel cover body 65g. A switching member 65h that protrudes to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is locked with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and the back cover. A flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m for covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. It consists of

FIG. 9 is a sectional view of the first variable prize winning device 65. FIG. 9(c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 9(b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 9(b), the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 9(b). The bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. The game balls that have passed through the detection port 65a1 are guided to the distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 10(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9(b), the opening of the specific winning hole 65a can be opened in an open state in which a game ball can enter, or in an open state in which a ball cannot enter, by means of an opening/closing door 65f1 that is configured with a shutter mechanism that can come in and out from the game board 13 side. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper part of the opening/closing door. In addition, in the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be retreated from the specific winning opening 65a by being retreated inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13). With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves toward the second winning opening 64b. configured to be guided.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, more game balls can efficiently enter the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 9(a) is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 9(b). As shown in FIG. 9A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 10, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 10(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 that guides the game ball, and the channel cover body 65g It is pivotably supported from the back side. Here, the channel cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distributed channel from the back side of the channel cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be placed anywhere.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . The game balls that have passed through the special discharge port 65e2 are detected by the V winning switch 65e3, which is composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of game balls provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as out balls. Ru.

In this embodiment, in small wins A to D (all small wins), the guide piece 65h2 is switched to the open state shown in FIG. 10(a) for 2 seconds from the start of the small win game. On the other hand, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 becomes open 2 seconds after the start of the small winning game for small winnings A to C, and at that time, the guiding piece 65h2 is switched to the closed state, so that the special winning The game ball won in the opening 65a cannot be guided to the specific outlet 65e2. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is set to be impossible (difficult) to win.

On the other hand, in the small win D, the door 65f1 is open for 1 second from the start of the small win game, then closed for 0.2 seconds, and then opened again for 1 second. As a result, when a game ball enters the special entrance ball opening 65a in the open state in the small hit D, the guidance piece 65h2 is set in the open state, so the game ball is sent to the special discharge port 65e2 by the guidance piece 65h2. is induced and a prize is entered in the V winning switch 65e3. As a result, after the small win D, the start of the jackpot game is executed.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game ball passes through the above-mentioned V winning switch 65e3 during the small winning game (small winning D), so that the jackpot game can be played after the small winning game. is started. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is set as a winning opening to which a jackpot game is awarded. The probability of a jackpot in the first special symbol or second special symbol lottery is 1/400, but the probability of a small win is as high as 399/400. Therefore, the player can play the game with more expectation that a jackpot game will be awarded by winning the small win D than if a jackpot will be awarded by drawing a special symbol.

With reference to FIG. 10(b), a case where game balls are guided to the normal discharge port 65e2 will be described. In addition, in the small winnings A to D in this embodiment, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small winning game, the closed state shown in FIG. 10(b) is changed. FIG. 10(b) is a diagram showing a state (closed state) in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

The game balls guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 are guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and are normally guided to the discharge port 65e1. At the end of this normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 is provided which is constituted by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of game balls. Thereby, whether all the game balls that entered the first variable winning device 65 have been ejected can be determined based on the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the V winning switch 65e3.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player is given a prize ball (in this embodiment, for each ball won) as a bonus. 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the detected game ball to determine whether it passes through the V winning switch 65e3 or not, it is possible to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to give a jackpot game state. can. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning hole for providing a jackpot gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

In this embodiment, a jackpot is awarded based on the game ball passing through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65 described above. As a result, even if a jackpot is not achieved in the jackpot lottery, the player plays the small winning game in the hope that the game ball will pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the player's interest can be improved.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 performs special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the following operations.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used in the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first winning type counter C2 used for the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, a second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 28), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 44). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol execution area 203a that corresponds to a winning to the first winning opening 64a and a second special symbol execution area 203b that corresponds to a winning to the second winning opening 64b, each consisting of one execution area. Each of these areas has a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter according to the timing of the ball entering the first winning hole 64a or the second winning hole 64b. The values of C3 and small hit type counter C4 are stored respectively. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal pattern execution area 203c consisting of one execution area, and each of these areas is provided with a normal pattern execution area 203c that is set in accordance with the timing when the ball passes through the normal starting gate (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 12. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 299). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 44).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64a or the second winning hole 64b. is stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot for the special symbol is set by the jackpot random number table (see FIG. 14(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is If it matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

Here, the jackpot random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. 14(a). The jackpot random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set that are determined to be a win in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "399" in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If the result is "399", it is determined that it is a jackpot. Further, it is determined whether the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 is one of "0 to 398", and if it is one of "0 to 398", it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is not a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, that is, a special symbol small hit. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one at the time of a small hit of the special symbol (if it stops before one of the special symbols).

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol execution area 203a.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is low, there is one random value that becomes a jackpot for the special symbol, and that random value "399" is as described above. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 1 out of a total of 400 random numbers, the probability of a special symbol winning a jackpot is "1/400".

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 198. Then, in this first winning type counter C2, when the random number value is one of "0 to 198", the jackpot type is "15R jackpot (jackpot A)". In addition, in this embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is one, but it is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided. Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first winning type counter C2, different jackpot types may be selected. With this configuration, for example, by setting a jackpot type in which more rounds are executed when a jackpot is achieved with the second special symbol, it is possible for the player to win more easily with the second special symbol. It can make you look forward to it.

The small winning type counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 198. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the small win type (small win A ~D) will be selected. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG. 14(d).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 44) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Note that the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 15(c) and FIG. 16) that stores a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

A plurality of variation pattern tables (see FIGS. 15(c) and 16) are set in the variation pattern selection table 202f. In this variation pattern table, a plurality of variation pattern tables dedicated to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and a variation pattern table is set for each validity determination result. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIG. 15(c) and FIG. 16.

The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 100). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) occurs, and when the ball passes through the normal starting gate (through gate) 67 on either the left or the right. When this is detected, it is acquired and stored in the general pattern execution area 203c of the RAM 203.

The random number value for winning the normal symbol is set by the random number table 202b (see FIG. 14(b)) for the common symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and is determined by the value of the second winning random number counter C4. If it matches the value of the random number that is a hit set by the random number table 202b per ordinary symbol, it is determined that the ordinary symbol (second symbol) has won.

The common figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal pattern variation pattern is selected based on the value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 and the normal pattern variation pattern table 202g. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG. 15(b).

FIG. 14(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table 202b per normal figure mentioned above. In this normal symbol per random number table 202b, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 10 random numbers that will be a hit for a normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 9". These random numbers are stored in the random number table 202b per normal figure. In this way, since the total number of random numbers that are a hit is 10 out of a total of 100 random numbers, the probability that the normal symbol will be a hit is "1/10".

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and a variable display of the normal symbol is executed on the second symbol display device 83 for 0.5 seconds or 1 second. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined that the win is won, and after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (the second symbol ), and the symbol "○" is lit up and displayed, and the second prize opening 64b is opened only "0.5 seconds x once". In addition, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the normal electric accessories, and the number of openings may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not impair the gameplay.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 339), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 44).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 12, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 44) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 43). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 42) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment. In addition to the above-mentioned jackpot random number table 202a, normal pattern random number table 202b, and jackpot type table 202c, the ROM 202 includes a small winning type selection table 202d, a state transition table 202e, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, and a general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g. , a small hit scenario table 202h, a jackpot scenario table 202i, and an other data table 202z are set.

The small winning type selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 14(d). This small winning type selection table 202d is used to select a small winning type based on the small winning type selection counter C4 which acquires the small winning type to be executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small winning. This is the selection table. The small winning type selection counter C4 is a random value that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is a random value that is obtained based on the game ball entering the first winning hole 64a or the second winning hole 64b. It is a numerical value. FIG. 14(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection table 202d. In the small hit type selection table 202d, special small hit types are set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the first special symbol, three types of small winnings A, small winnings B, and small winnings C are set. For small win A, "0 to 179" is set as the judgment value of small win type selection counter C4, and for small win B, "180 to 195" is set as the judgment value of small win type selection counter C4. For the small win C, "196 to 198" is set as the determination value of the small win type selection counter C4. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, "0 to 198" is set as the judgment value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small win D, and the small win D is always set for the small win of the second special symbol. It is configured to

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol is configured to be switched by executing the small hits A to D. In detail, as shown in FIG. 14(d), when small win A is executed, special figure 2 small win fluctuation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16(b)) is set as state A, When small hit B is executed, special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern table 2 (see FIG. 16(c)) is set as state B, and when small hit C and small hit D are executed, As state C, special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern table 3 (see FIG. 16(d)) is set. As will be described later, when state B and state C are set, when the special symbol change of the number of transitions set in the state transition table 202e (see FIG. 15(a)) is executed, The configuration is such that state A is set. That is, after small win B, small win C, and small win D are executed, each variation pattern table is selected only for the set number of transitions, and then switched to the variation pattern table in state A. It is configured as follows. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table set in state A is set as the fluctuation pattern table in normal times.

FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state transition table 202e. As described above, this state transition table 202e is a data table in which periods in which states A to C are set are set. In state A, an infinite number of times is set. That is, until any of the small wins B to D is executed, the state A remains set. In state B, the number of state transitions is set to 40. When small hit B is executed and state B is set, state B is set until the number of changes in the special symbol (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches 40, and then state A is set. In state C, the number of state transitions is set to 30. When small hit C or small hit D is executed and state C is set, state C is set until the number of changes in the special symbol (total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches 30. and then state A is set. Note that in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the state transitions to state A after the number of state transitions has elapsed, but the configuration is not limited thereto, and the configuration may be such that the transition to another state occurs. For example, it may be configured to transition from state C to state B and then to state A. Further, in the state C, the number of state transitions is the same for the small win C and the small win D, but the number of transitions is not limited to this, and the number of transitions may be different for the small win C and the small win D. Furthermore, when a small win D is executed, a state other than state C may be set. In addition, although there is one type of small hit type for the second special symbol, two types are set, and one has a limited number of transitions (for example, 30 times) and the other has an infinite number of transitions, so that the probability variable game can be improved. As such, a variable pattern table in which it is easy to win the next small win D can be continuously set, and a state in which it is easy to award the next jackpot game to the player and a state in which it is difficult to be awarded can be divided.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202f will be explained with reference to FIGS. 15(c) and 16. In this variation pattern selection table 202f, variation pattern tables are set which are exclusively selected for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. FIG. 15(c) shows a winning variation pattern for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 when the judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot. It is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a selection table 202f. The winning variation pattern selection table 202f includes, as variation patterns of the first special symbol, special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern A (variation time 0.5 seconds), special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern B (variation time 3 seconds), and special figure 1. A jackpot fluctuation pattern C (fluctuation time of 4 seconds) is set respectively. For the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern A, "0 to 50" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and for the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern B, "0 to 50" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. 51 to 100" is set, and for the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern C, "101 to 198" is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this way, when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, the special pattern 1 jackpot variation pattern C consisting of a variation time of 4 seconds is most likely to be selected, and the special pattern 1 jackpot variation pattern A, the special pattern 1 jackpot variation pattern One jackpot fluctuation pattern B is set at substantially the same selection ratio. In this embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating and displayed at the same time, if one of the fluctuations stops first, the other fluctuation is forcibly rewritten to a winning lottery result. Even if it is in the middle of the variable time, it will be forced to stop. Therefore, even if the fluctuation of the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, if the fluctuation of the small hit of the first special symbol stops first, the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the jackpot will be treated as a losing lottery result. There may be a problem where the jackpot is invalidated because it is rewritten and the display is forcibly stopped. However, as will be explained later, the shortest fluctuation time for the second special symbol to become a small hit is 4 seconds, so the fluctuation of the second special symbol for a small win, which always starts to fluctuate after the first special symbol, stops first. The configuration is such that there is nothing to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the variation drawn by the jackpot of the first special symbol becomes invalid.

On the other hand, a special symbol 2 jackpot variation pattern D (variation time 0.5 seconds) is set as a variation pattern that results in a jackpot for the second special symbol. In this embodiment, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when a jackpot is determined with the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern D is always selected. It is configured. The fluctuation time of this special pattern 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern D is composed of 0.5 seconds, so it is set to a fluctuation time that always stops earlier than the fluctuation of the first special symbol that becomes a small hit. When a jackpot is determined with a special symbol, the fluctuation resulting in a small win of the first special symbol is first stopped and displayed, and a malfunction in which the fluctuation resulting in a jackpot of the second special symbol becomes invalid can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 16(a), when the judgment result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a small hit, special symbol 1 small is used to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol. The winning variation pattern selection table 202f will be explained. FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this special figure 1 small winning variation pattern selection table 202f. In this embodiment, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a jackpot, that is, if it is a miss, it is determined to be a small win.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), in the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern selection table 202f, the types of variation patterns to be selected are special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern B (variation time 7 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 10 seconds) are set. . For the special figure 1 variation pattern A, "0 to 99" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1, and for the special figure 1 variation pattern B, the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. "100 to 149" is set, and for special figure 1 variation pattern C, "150 to 179" is set as the judgment value of variation type counter CS1, and for special figure 1 variation pattern D. "180 to 190" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1, and "191 to 198" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special drawing 1 variation pattern E. has been done. Therefore, when the judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the special symbol 1 variation pattern A with the shortest variation time of 5 seconds is selected with the highest probability of 100/199. It is configured to Therefore, when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a small hit, the short variation time is easily selected. Special figure 1 variation pattern B with a variation time of 7 seconds has a probability of 50/199, and special figure 1 variation pattern C with a variation time of 10 seconds has a probability of 30/199, special figure 1 with a variation time of 15 seconds. The variation pattern D is selected with a probability of 11/199, and the special figure 1 variation pattern E with a variation time of 20 seconds is selected with a probability of 8/199.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, the longer the variation pattern is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, the more the second special symbol stops first when the second special symbol fluctuates. In this way, a small win of the second special symbol is executed, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the longer the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the lower the probability that it will be selected, so it is possible to suppress disadvantages on the gaming parlor side and prevent the gambling nature from becoming too high. .

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of second special symbol variation pattern selection tables to be described later are provided, and the probability (ratio) of each variation pattern being selected is set to be different in each table. Since the switching of the variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol is made in accordance with the type of small hit of the first special symbol, even if the small win of the first special symbol is disadvantageous to the player, By switching the second special symbol variation pattern selection table to a variation pattern selection table in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be selected, a gaming state advantageous to the player can be set. Therefore, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (a gaming state in which it is easy to make a small hit with the second special symbol) and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (a gaming state in which it is difficult to make a small winning with the second special symbol) There is an effect that this can be done by switching the variation pattern selection table of 2 special symbols.

With reference to FIGS. 16(b) to 16(d), special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection tables 1 to 3 for selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small winning will be explained. do. FIG. 16(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 1. This special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 1 is a table that is set when state A is set. Here, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that states A to C are selected and set as described above. When a small hit of the first special symbol is executed, the states A to C are set corresponding to the type of small win (see FIG. 14(d)). When state B and state C are set, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner until the total number of times (number of drawings) reaches a predetermined number of times, or a new The setting is continued until a different state is set due to a small hit of the first special symbol. When the predetermined number of times is reached, the state is shifted to state A and set. Therefore, state A is a state set in normal times (including when the power is turned on after initialization). As mentioned above, the specified number of times of state B and state C is set by the state transition table 202e shown in FIG. 15(a), and in state B, the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 40 times, and in state C, 30 times is set as the specified number of times as the total number of fluctuations.

Details will be described later, but when state B is set, special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 2 is set, and when state C is set, special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 3 is set. are set respectively. The probability of a short variation pattern being selected is set higher in the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 than the special figure 2 small win variation pattern selection table 1, The special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 3 is set to have a high probability of selecting a short variation pattern. That is, the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 3 is a variation pattern selection table in which the gaming state that is most advantageous for the player is set, and the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 2 is a variation pattern selection table in which the gaming state that is most advantageous for the player is set. The special figure 2 small winning variable pattern selection table 1 becomes the variable pattern selection table that is advantageous to the player and provides the gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 16(b) to (d), in the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 2, special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds), special figure 2 variation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds), ), special figure 2 variation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds), special figure 2 variation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds), special figure 2 variation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) are special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table It is set from 1 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), in the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 1, "0" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern F, "1 to 7" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the 2 variation pattern G, and "8 to 27" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern H. "28 to 47" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern I, and "28 to 47" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern J. 48 to 198" is set. The probability that the special pattern 2 variation pattern F with the shortest variation time will be selected is 1/199, and the probability that the special pattern 2 variation pattern G with the next shortest variation time will be selected is 7/199. The probability that a short variation time will be selected is set low. On the other hand, the probability that the special figure 2 variation patterns H to J, which are variation patterns with relatively long variation times, are selected is set higher than in other variation pattern selection tables. Therefore, the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 1 is set so that the probability of short variation patterns being selected is low, and the variation pattern selection table is set to be disadvantageous to the player (game state disadvantageous to the player). ing.

Next, the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 16(c). FIG. 16(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 2. The special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 2 is a fluctuation pattern selection table that is set when the above-mentioned state B is set. The only difference from the above-mentioned special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16(b)) is that the selection ratio of each variation pattern is different, so only the selection ratio will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), in the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 2, "0 to 2" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern F. "3-17" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the variation pattern G in Figure 2, and "18-47" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern H "48 to 97" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern I, and "48 to 97" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern J. "98-198" is set. The probability that the special figure 2 variation pattern F with the shortest variation time will be selected is 3/199, and the probability that the special figure 2 variation pattern G with the next shortest variation time will be selected is 15/199. Therefore, compared to special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16(b)), special figure 2 variation pattern F is set with a selection probability of 3 times, and special figure 2 variation pattern G is set with a selection probability of about 2 times. The selection probability is set to double. Therefore, since there is a high probability that a variation pattern with a short variation time will be selected, a variation pattern in which the variation of the second special symbol stops before the variation of the first special symbol is more likely to be selected, which is advantageous to the player. The setting is such that a small hit of the second special symbol is easily executed.

Next, the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 16(d). FIG. 16(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 3. The special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3 is a variation pattern selection table that is set when the above-mentioned state C is set. The special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 1 (see Figure 16(b)) and the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 2 (see Figure 16(c)) already described above are based on the selection ratio of each variation pattern. Since they differ only in different points, only the selection ratio will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 16(d), in the special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 3, "0 to 7" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern F. "8 to 48" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the variation pattern G in FIG. "99 to 198" is set as the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern I, and the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 for the special figure 2 variation pattern J is It is configured such that the special figure 2 variation pattern J that is not set, that is, the special figure 2 variation pattern J is not selected. The probability that the special figure 2 variation pattern F with the shortest variation time will be selected is 8/199, and the probability that the special figure 2 variation pattern G with the next shortest variation time will be selected is 41/199. Therefore, compared to special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 1 (see FIG. 16(b)), special figure 2 variation pattern F is set with a selection probability of 8 times, and special figure 2 variation pattern G is set with a selection probability of about 6 times. The selection probability is set to double. Therefore, since there is a high probability that a variation pattern with a short variation time will be selected, a variation pattern in which the variation of the second special symbol stops before the variation of the first special symbol is more likely to be selected, which is advantageous to the player. The setting is such that a small hit of the second special symbol is easily executed. Furthermore, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 3 is configured so that the special figure 2 variation pattern J is not selected.

Here, in the special pattern 2 small hit fluctuation pattern J (19 seconds), as already explained with reference to FIG. 18, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol Only when special symbol 1 variation pattern E (selection probability 8/199) in which is 20 seconds is selected, the second special symbol can stop first, and the probability that the second special symbol stops first is It is set extremely low. Therefore, the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 3 is configured so that the special figure 2 variation pattern J is not selected, so that the setting is more advantageous to the player.

In this way, in this embodiment, by varying the probability that the variable time of the second special symbol will be selected, it is set to switch between an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player. Here, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops first in combination with the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2). We will explain the combinations of fluctuation patterns. FIG. 17 is a quick reference table showing combinations of variation patterns in which the second special symbol stops first, and FIG. 18 is a timing chart showing the stop timing of each variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. be.

First, with reference to FIG. 18, a case will be described in which the variable display periods of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may overlap. In addition, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation|variation of the 2nd special symbol is started, it is comprised so that the 1st special symbol always fluctuates. The game ball that enters the first winning hole 64a, which triggers the start of variation of the first special symbol, passes through the through gate 67 about 0.2 seconds before entering the first winning hole 64a. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the fluctuation of the normal symbols starts 0.2 seconds before the ball enters the first winning hole 64a (special drawing 1 winning). The variation patterns selected for the judgment result of the first special symbol being a small hit are special figure 1 variation pattern A (abbreviated as "A"), special figure 1 variation pattern B (abbreviated as "B"). ), special figure 1 variation pattern C (abbreviated as “C”), special figure 1 variation pattern D (abbreviated as “D”), special figure 1 variation pattern E (abbreviated as “E”). There are five types (omitted), and their respective fluctuation periods are shown in a timing chart in FIG. 18(a).

There are two types of fluctuation time for the normal symbol: 0.5 seconds and 1 second, and the time chart of each fluctuation period of the second special symbol when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds is shown below. FIG. 18(c) shows a time chart of each variation period of the second special symbol when the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second as shown in FIG. 18(b).

As shown in FIG. 18(b), when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, the fluctuation of the regular symbol ends 0.3 seconds after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, If the normal symbol is a hit, the normal electric accessory 64b1 will be in an open state for 0.5 seconds, and a period during which the game ball can enter the second prize opening 64b is set during that 0.5 second. . That is, the fluctuation start timing of the second special symbol is a period from 0.3 seconds to 0.8 seconds after the first special symbol begins to fluctuate. In FIG. 18(b), as an example in which the second special symbol starts to fluctuate earliest, the timing is when a prize is won in the second winning hole 64b 0.3 seconds after the first special symbol begins to fluctuate and the fluctuation starts. Showed the chart. The fluctuation patterns when the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit are, as shown in FIG. 18(b), special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern F (abbreviated as “F”), special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern G (abbreviated as “G”), Special figure 2 variation pattern H (abbreviated as “H”), Special figure 2 variation pattern I (abbreviated as “I”), Special figure 2 variation pattern J (abbreviated as "J"), and the fluctuation end timing is indicated for each fluctuation pattern.

In the case of special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds), even if special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) with the shortest variation time of the first special symbol is being executed, that feature The variation time of the special figure 2 variation pattern F ends 0.7 seconds earlier than the variation time of the variation pattern A in FIG. 1 ends. From this, no matter which variation pattern is being executed with the first special symbol, the special symbol 2 variation pattern F will end first, and the small hit of the second special symbol will be executed (see Figure 17(a)) ). In addition, the period during which the second special symbol can fluctuate is 0.5 seconds from the timing shown in Figure 18(b), but even if it starts fluctuating after 0.5 seconds, which is the latest, it is still faster than the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern A. Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F will stop 0.2 seconds earlier. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds and the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern F is selected, the fluctuation of the second special symbol always stops earlier than the first special symbol, and the second special symbol A small win advantageous to the player is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it advantageous for the player that the special symbol 2 variation pattern F is executed when the normal symbol variation time is 0.5 seconds.

Similarly, special figure 2 variation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) stops 0.7 seconds earlier than special figure 1 variation pattern B (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), with respect to special figure 1 variation pattern B, special figure 1 variation pattern C, special figure 1 variation pattern D, and special figure 1 variation pattern E, there is a variation pattern that stops first. Become. Special figure 2 variation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds) stops 0.7 seconds earlier than special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), this is a variation pattern that stops earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern C, the special figure 1 variation pattern D, and the special figure 1 variation pattern E. Special figure 2 variation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds) stops 0.7 seconds earlier than special figure 1 variation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), this is a variation pattern that stops earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern D and the special figure 1 variation pattern E. Special figure 2 variation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) stops 0.7 seconds earlier than special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), only the special figure 1 variation pattern E is a variation pattern that stops first. As described above, even if the ball enters the second winning hole 64b at the latest timing (0.5 seconds later), the state shown in FIG. 17(a) remains unchanged. Therefore, when the regular figure fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, if the ball enters during the open period in which the normal electric accessory 64b1 is in the open state, the player is not disadvantaged due to the ball entry timing. has been done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18(c), a case where the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second will be described. When the normal symbol fluctuation time is 1 second, the normal electric accessory 64b1 becomes open state 1.3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 18(a) (normal symbol determination result is a hit). Therefore, when the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the winning period from 1.3 seconds to 1.8 seconds after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate will be the winning period in the second winning slot 64b. . In FIG. 18(c), when the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the second special symbol starts to fluctuate at the earliest, which is 1.3 seconds after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and the second winning hole 64b A timing chart of the small winning variation pattern of each second special symbol in the case of winning is shown.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), in the case of special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds), special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) with the shortest variation time of the first special symbol. Even if is executed, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation pattern F ends 0.3 seconds later than the variation time of the special figure 1 variation pattern A ends. From this, the special figure 1 variation pattern A will first stop changing, and at that timing, the special figure 2 variation pattern F will be rewritten to be off and forced to stop. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the special pattern 2 variation pattern F ends before the special pattern 1 variation pattern B to special pattern 1 variation pattern E, and the small hit of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, although the period during which the second special symbol can vary is 0.5 seconds from the timing shown in FIG. The relationship between the stop timing and the fluctuation pattern remains unchanged. Therefore, if the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, if the special symbol 1 variation patterns B to E are executed, it is advantageous for the player to execute the special symbol 2 variation pattern F. Become.

Similarly, special figure 2 variation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than special figure 1 variation pattern B (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), this is the variation pattern that stops first with respect to the special figure 1 variation pattern C, the special figure 1 variation pattern D, and the special figure 1 variation pattern E. Special figure 2 variation pattern H (variation time 9 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), this is a variation pattern that stops earlier than the special figure 1 variation pattern D and the special figure 1 variation pattern E. Special figure 2 variation pattern I (variation time 14 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than special figure 1 variation pattern D (variation time 15 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), only the special figure 1 variation pattern E becomes a variation pattern that stops first. Special figure 2 variation pattern J (variation time 19 seconds) stops 0.3 seconds later than special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 7 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), it is a variation pattern that cannot be stopped first with respect to all the variation patterns of the first special symbol. Therefore, when the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the variation pattern is such that a small hit of the first special symbol is always executed, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a summary of the fluctuation stop timing when the small hit fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate at the same time will be described. FIG. 17(a) shows that when a normal symbol fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected after passing through the through gate 67, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is opened by the fluctuation, and the If the second special symbol can stop first due to the combination of the variation pattern selected by the first special symbol and the variation pattern selected by the second special symbol when winning the second winning hole 64b. This is a quick reference table in which "○" indicates a combination where the first special symbol stops first (a combination where the second special symbol cannot stop first) and "x" indicates a combination where the first special symbol stops first (a combination where the second special symbol cannot stop first).

When special figure 1 variation pattern A (abbreviated as "A") is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, special figure 2 variation pattern F (abbreviated as "A") is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Only when the symbol (abbreviated as “F”) is selected, the second special symbol can be stopped first. When other special symbol 2 variation patterns G to J are selected, the first special symbol stops first, and the second special symbol is forcibly stopped as a miss.

Similarly, with the first special symbol, special pattern 1 variation pattern B (abbreviated as "B"), special pattern 2 variation pattern F and special pattern 2 variation pattern G, special pattern 1 variation pattern C. (abbreviated as “C”), special figure 2 variation patterns F to H, special figure 1 variation pattern D (abbreviated as “D”), special figure 2 variation patterns F to H. I, special pattern 1 variation pattern E (abbreviated as "E"), special pattern 2 variation pattern F to J (i.e., a variation pattern that results in a small hit of all the second special symbols, and the second special The symbol can be stopped first), and the second special symbol can be stopped first. Therefore, when the special pattern 1 variation pattern E is selected with the first special symbol, it is most advantageous for the player, and by winning the second prize opening 64b, a small hit is executed with the second special symbol. (If the lottery result is a small win). Although omitted in this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variation pattern E is selected, a notification urging the player to win in the second winning hole 64b is given by voice or display mode on the third symbol display device 81. , by making a notification using a lamp, etc., it is possible to increase the player's desire to win a prize in the second winning hole 64b.

FIG. 17(b) is a quick reference showing a combination of fluctuation patterns in which the second special symbol stops first when 1 second is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol compared to FIG. 17(a). It is a display. As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the first special symbol and the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern A (abbreviated as “A”), for all the small winning fluctuation patterns of the second special symbol, The second special symbol does not stop first, and the small hit of the first special symbol is executed.

The first special symbol is the special pattern 1 variation pattern B (abbreviated as "B"), the special symbol 2 variation pattern F is the special symbol 1 variation pattern C (abbreviated as "C") ), special figure 2 variation pattern F and special figure 2 variation pattern G, special figure 1 variation pattern D (abbreviated as "D"), special figure 2 variation pattern F to H, special figure 1 In the variation pattern E (abbreviated as "E"), the second special symbol stops first in the special pattern 2 variation patterns F to I (that is, the variation pattern that results in a small hit for all the second special symbols). ), the second special symbol can be stopped first. Therefore, if 1 second is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the period during which it is possible to win in the second winning hole 64b will be delayed, so the second special symbol can be stopped earlier than in the case of 0.5 seconds. This reduces the number of possible combinations, which is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, the player's disadvantage or advantage can be varied not only by the combination of the variation types of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but also by the variation pattern type of the normal symbol. When 0.5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the normal symbol, the type of variation start sound of the normal symbol is made different, or an effect suggesting the variation type of the Futsu symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This may be configured to suggest that the player is in an advantageous situation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(b), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 13) of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 15(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g. This normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g is used to determine the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of normal symbols based on the value of the obtained normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 when the game ball passes through the through gate 67. This is the selection table. In this embodiment, a normal pattern variation pattern A and a normal pattern variation pattern B are set as the variation patterns of the selected normal symbols. The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern A is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). Further, the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern B is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 1000 ms (1 second). For the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern A, "0 to 29" is set as the judgment value of the ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2, and for the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern B, as the judgment value of the ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2, "30 to 198" is set. is set. In this way, as the variation time of the normal symbol, the variation time of 1 second is set to be more easily selected than the variation time of 0.5 seconds.

Here, in this embodiment, the advantage or disadvantage for the player is different depending on the length of the variation time of the normal symbols. The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is detected by the detection switch in the first winning hole 64a 0.2 seconds later, and the first special symbol starts to fluctuate. Here, since the second special symbol stops earlier than the first special symbol, the small hit D is more likely to be executed, so the second winning hole 64b is opened at an earlier timing after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate. It is more advantageous for the player to win the game ball in the game. Therefore, the shorter the regular symbol fluctuation time is, the more advantageous it is to the player. In this embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern A (0.5 second fluctuation) is set to be less likely to be selected than the normal pattern fluctuation pattern B (1 second), so it is configured to suppress the gambling nature.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table is set to be constant regardless of the gaming state, but the table is not limited to this, and may be configured to be changed depending on when a small hit or a jackpot game is executed. You can. With this configuration, it is possible to switch to a state advantageous to the player by switching to a normal pattern variation pattern table in which a shorter variation time is easily selected than in normal times.

The small winning scenario table 202h (see FIG. 13) is a data table for controlling the opening and closing of the first variable winning device 65 when a small winning game is executed. This small win scenario table 202h is set up in correspondence with each small win type. Pointers are set in chronological order, and the pointers are updated one by one as time passes. Each control of the first variable prize winning device 65 set by the pointer is executed. Thereby, even if the release control etc. differ for each small winning type, the control can be easily executed.

The jackpot scenario table 202i (see FIG. 13) will be explained. The jackpot scenario table 202i is a scenario table that is set when a jackpot game is executed, and is a data table in which control details of the second variable winning device 650 are defined. Similar to the small winning scenario table 202i, the control contents of the second variable prize winning device 650 are defined for each pointer set in chronological order, and the pointer is updated one by one as time passes, and the updated pointer is Control is executed according to the specified control contents.

The other data table 202z is set with various data, tables, etc. necessary for other games, but since these are well-known contents that are unrelated to the contents of the present invention, their explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol execution area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a regular symbol execution area 203c, a first winning counter 203d1, a second winning counter 203d2, a V winning flag 203e, and a jackpot. Has a flag 203f, a special figure 1 variation stop flag 203g, a special figure 2 variation stop flag 203h, a special figure 1 small winning flag 203i, a special figure 2 small winning flag 203j, a state counter 203k, a state setting area 203m, and other memory areas 203z. are doing.

The first special symbol execution area 203a is composed of one execution area as shown in FIG. In the first special symbol execution area 203a, at the timing when the ball enters the first prize opening 64a (starting prize winning), the first special symbol is in a stopped state (fluctuation ends) when the ball is not in a small winning game or a big winning game. (state), the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small winning type counter C4 obtained based on the winning are stored respectively. . Thereafter, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes various processes for starting variation of the first special symbol.

The second special symbol execution area 203b differs from the first special symbol execution area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning in the second winning hole 64b are stored, and other configurations are different. are the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The common symbol execution area 203c has one execution area, similar to the first special symbol execution area 203a and the second special symbol execution area 203b. This normal pattern execution area 203c stores the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal start port 67 on either the left or right side, the state in which the normal symbol is not in the winning game and the normal symbol is stopped (the state in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has finished) ), the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal pattern execution area 203c.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the reservation first area of the normal symbol execution area 203c is 203c, and based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal pattern execution area 203c, a determination such as a lottery of winning of the normal symbol is performed. Thereafter, a common pattern variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the common pattern variation type counter CS2, and variation of the common pattern is executed.

The first winning counter 203d1 is the number of game balls that entered the second specific winning hole 650a of the second variable winning device 650 in one round (open state) in the small winning game (that is, the number of game balls that entered the second variable winning device 650). The second winning counter 203d2 is the number of game balls that entered the first specific winning slot 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (i.e., the number of game balls that entered the first specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65). 65 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the ball. Specifically, the second winning counter 203d2 increases by 1 based on the game ball passing through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 8) provided in the first variable winning device 65 and being detected by the detection switch. The first winning counter 203d1 is incremented by 1 and updated based on the passage of the game ball being detected by a detection switch (not shown) provided in the second variable winning device 650. be done. On the other hand, the value of the first prize winning counter 203d1 determines whether the number of prizes won by the first variable prize winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) matches the number of prizes dispensed when one round ends. After that, it is reset to the initial value "0". Further, the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is reset to the initial value "0" based on the completion of one round. Note that the value of this prize winning number counter 203d is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The jackpot flag 203e is a flag indicating that the judgment result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot. This jackpot flag 203e is configured to be able to identify whether it is a jackpot determination for the first special symbol or a jackpot determination for the second special symbol.

The special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is a flag indicating that it is the timing to forcibly stop the fluctuating first special symbol. This special figure 1 variation stop flag 203g is set to ON when the variation of jackpot or small hit is stopped for the second special symbol (see S913 in FIG. 39 and S941 in FIG. 40(b)). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol 1 variation stop flag 203g is on during variation of the first special symbol, it is set to OFF (S611 in FIG. 34). Thereby, the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing at which the fluctuation of the big hit or small win of the second special symbol stops first.

The special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is a flag indicating that it is the timing to forcibly stop the fluctuating second special symbol. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to ON when the fluctuation of the jackpot or small hit is stopped for the second special symbol (see S603 in FIG. 33 and S621 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203h is on during variation of the second special symbol, it is set to OFF (S931 in FIG. 40(a)). Thereby, the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing at which the fluctuation of the big hit or small win of the first special symbol stops first.

The state counter 203k is a counter for counting the prescribed number of times in state B or state C that the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern 2 or the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern 3 is selected. In this embodiment, as described above, when the small win B or C of the first special symbol and the small win D of the second special symbol are won, the subsequent small win fluctuation pattern table of the second special symbol is created. It was set to switch to a predetermined variation pattern table a specified number of times. The prescribed number of times defines the number of times that the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate, and when the prescribed number of times is reached, the state shifts to state A, and a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to state A is set. . In this state counter 203k, when the small hit of the first special symbol and the small win of the second special symbol are completed, corresponding states are set, and the value of the state counter corresponding to the set state is set. (S1807, S1809 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol each start to fluctuate, they are subtracted by one and updated (S305 in FIG. 30, S705 in FIG. 36).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, etc. are set (stored).

Returning to FIG. 11, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, a solenoid that opens and closes the first specific winning opening 65a, A solenoid 209 is connected to the large opening solenoid for opening and closing the second specific prize opening 650a forwardly with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc., and the MPU 201 has an input/output function. Various commands and control signals are sent to these via the port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives output from the various switches 208. and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, includes a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 42) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a force corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview effects. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, includes a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the performance content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also issues instructions to the display control device 114.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls display of error commands including the type of error. to the device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 20, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a fusion effect selection table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a data table in which variation pattern data for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a varying manner based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is stored. In the present embodiment, the variable pattern selection table 222a includes variable display patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2 shown in FIG. 4(a). is stored. In this variable display pattern, a pattern is set in which a "◯" symbol and an "x" symbol are alternately switched and displayed in response to a varying time determined by the main controller 110.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), the fusion production selection table 222b is composed of a winning fusion production selection table 222b1, a losing fusion production selection table 222b2, a preparation production selection table 222b3, and a special production selection table 222b4. This is a selection table for selecting a fusion effect to be displayed in the effect display area Ds3 of the display device 81. The winning fusion performance and the losing fusion performance are fusion performances displayed in the performance display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 during a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the winning fusion effect changes from the display mode in which the competition between the rabbit and the turtle starts as shown in FIG. 4(b) to the display mode in which the turtle wins the competition over the rabbit as shown in FIG. 5(b), After that, it consists of a blackout effect. The losing fusion performance differs from the winning fusion performance in that the rabbit wins. The fact that the turtle wins indicates that the second special symbol will stop before the first special symbol and that the small win D of the second special symbol will be executed. On the other hand, when the rabbit wins, it means that the variable display of the first special symbol stops first and one of the small wins A to C of the first special symbol is executed.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol always starts changing before the second special symbol (see FIG. 4(a)). Here, for the player, even if the first special symbol stops first and a small hit of the first special symbol is executed, the profit for the player is a small amount of balls (prize ball) or the first special symbol. The variation pattern table of the second special symbol is switched, etc., and this does not directly trigger a jackpot, and is set at a disadvantage compared to the small win of the second special symbol. Therefore, the player becomes interested in the second special symbol starting to fluctuate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for the third symbol (the symbol displayed in the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2) that shows the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, "○", With the "x" display, the display area is further reduced and placed at the bottom left and right edges of the display area so as not to be noticeable. On the other hand, the effect display area Ds3 is set larger than the first display area Ds1 and the second display area Ds2 so as to be noticeable to the player. Therefore, the player plays the game mainly by looking at the effect display area Ds3.

Here, in this embodiment, when the variation of the second special symbol is started and the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed simultaneously, the effect display area Ds3 shown in FIG. 4(a) The race between the rabbit and the turtle shown in FIG. 4(b) is started from the state before the race between the rabbit and the turtle is started, which is displayed in . For the player, by displaying the message "If the turtle wins in the race, you have a chance!!" at the top of the effect display area Ds3, if the turtle wins, the player is given a chance to win a V prize, which is advantageous to the player. It has been reported that this will happen. In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the small win D of the second special symbol, a small win game in which the game ball can pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is executed. When the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, the player is given the right to start the jackpot game after the small win game, so it is advantageous for the player to execute the small win D. This means that the

In the fusion effect, if the first special symbol stops first, the rabbit will finish before the turtle (see Figure 5(a)), and if the second special symbol stops first, the rabbit will reach the goal before the turtle. In this case, an effect is executed in which the turtle reaches the goal before the rabbit (see FIG. 5(b)). After that, the first special symbol stops first, and after a fusion effect in which the rabbit reaches the goal before the turtle (see Figure 5(a)) is displayed, the message "Unfortunate!! "Normal Chance!" is displayed. When the display mode of this fusion effect is displayed, the first special symbol's fluctuation time has passed and it stops (stops at the combination of "○ ×" indicating a small hit), and at that timing, the second special symbol is In the middle of the variable time, it is forcibly stopped by a symbol indicating a miss (stopped by a combination of "XX"). In addition, when the display mode of the fusion effect shown in FIG. 6(a) is displayed, the player is given the chance to win a V prize (that is, the right to execute a jackpot game) after a small hit of the first special symbol is executed. Although there is no possibility of winning a ball, it is possible to recognize that it is possible to win a ball in a small winning game. Therefore, the player prepares for a game in which the game ball enters the first variable winning device 650 using a game method in which the game ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game).

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 5(b), when a fusion effect in which the turtle wins in the race is displayed, the variable time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the symbol indicating a small win ("○ ×") is displayed. At that timing, the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at a symbol indicating a failure (a combination of stop symbols of "XX") in the middle of the fluctuation time. After that, as shown in FIG. 6(b), the words "Congratulations!! Chance to win a V prize!" are displayed, and the player is then informed that a small winning game with a possibility of winning a V prize will be executed. Ru. Therefore, the player can prepare for a game in which he plays a right-handed game and aims to win a V prize. As described above, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed simultaneously, and although the gameplay is complicated for the player, a fusion effect is displayed. Based on the content of the fusion performance, it can be determined whether or not a small win game advantageous to the player will be started, and the game can be played more easily.

Note that the above-described fusion performance in which the race between the rabbit and the turtle is performed is executed when the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both small wins. If the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot, the fluctuating display of the fusion effect will not start, and the words "Jackpot" will be displayed when the fluctuating time of the selected fluctuating pattern has elapsed. suddenly appears. In addition, after the first special symbol changes (the result of the judgment is a small hit), if the second special symbol does not start changing during the fluctuation period of the first special symbol, the fluctuating display of the fusion effect will not start. , a display mode indicating that a small winning game of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6(a) is started at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed is displayed. be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fusion performance is not started until the second special symbol starts to fluctuate after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, but the first special symbol is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the variation of the fusion performance is started at the timing when the variation starts (the start of the rabbit and turtle race). In this case, at the timing when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, control for resetting the fusion performance is set based on the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol that fluctuates and stops first. In addition, in this embodiment, the turtle performs the winning performance in the fusion performance only when the second special symbol stops first (the result of the judgment is a small hit), but the second special symbol is not limited to this. A performance lottery is executed with a predetermined probability at the start of variation of special symbols, and based on the lottery result, it is determined whether the turtle wins or the rabbit wins. In this case, if the second special symbol is a combination of variable patterns in which it stops first (the result of the judgment is a small hit), the probability of executing the fusion effect in which the turtle wins is set high, and the first special symbol If the pattern is a combination of fluctuation patterns in which the symbol stops first (the result of the judgment is a small hit), the probability of executing the fusion performance in which the rabbit wins is set high. Then, whether the rabbit wins or the turtle wins, the display formats shown in FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are not displayed, and the words "V winning chance" are displayed instead, and the V winning chance is displayed. To perform a performance that makes a player think that there is a possibility of this in the subsequent small winning game. Here, if the rabbit wins, the possibility of winning a V prize is low, and if the turtle wins, the possibility of winning a V prize is high. Even during a small winning game, the player can play the game with the expectation of winning a V prize, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the modification mentioned above, although the fusion performance was started from the start of variation of the second special symbol, it may be configured to start the fusion performance from the start of variation of the first special symbol.

Further, in this embodiment, the player is informed of the determination result between the first special symbol and the second special symbol in an easy-to-understand manner by means of the fusion performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (For example, it is composed of three symbol rows, and the judgment result is notified by the combination of the symbols), and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (For example, it is composed of three symbol rows, and the combination of the symbols is notified.) It is also possible to have a structure in which the game player plays the game in the expectation that a third symbol indicating a small win will be displayed as the second special symbol by variably displaying the determination results (indicating the determination result in the second special symbol). With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are each displayed in a variable manner at the same time.

The preparation performance selected from the preparation performance selection table 222b3 is a display mode before the rabbit and turtle start the competition shown in FIG. 4(a). In this case, the preparation effect is selected and displayed when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped, and when the variable display of only the first special symbol has started. .

The special performance selection table 222b4 is a table in which a special performance that is selected when the second special symbol starts changing before the first special symbol is set. In this special performance, the words "abnormal fluctuation" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an error comment. Thereby, it is possible to notify at an early stage that normal winnings or games are not being played.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20(c), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 20(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special figure 1 variation start flag 223c, a special figure 2 variation start flag 223d, and a special figure 1 variation start flag 223c. Stop type selection flag 223e, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f, production counter 223g, slave state setting area 223h, special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i, special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j, fusion production start flag 223k, etc. At least a memory area 223z is provided.

The command storage area 223a is a storage area for temporarily storing commands output from the main control device 110 and each control device to the audio lamp control device 113.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area corresponding to the first special symbol and one execution area corresponding to the second special symbol, and each of these areas has one execution area corresponding to the first special symbol and one execution area corresponding to the second special symbol. Information such as a fluctuation pattern outputted from the main controller 110 when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, and a result of determination of validity are stored.

The special figure 1 variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command for the first special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2301 in FIG. 54), and the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display of symbols is set (see S2602 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern for the first special symbol indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started so as to be performed.

The special figure 2 variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command for the second special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2401 in FIG. 55), and the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display of symbols is set (see S2602 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command. The display variation pattern command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as the above-described first special symbol variation pattern command.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the special figure 1 stop type command corresponding to the first special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2501 in FIG. 56), and the third symbol is displayed. It is turned off when the stop type of the first special symbol in the device 81 is set (see S2611 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as is based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command. In this embodiment, the stop mode of the display displayed in the first display area Ds1 is set.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when the special figure 2 stop type command corresponding to the second special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2501 in FIG. 56), and the third symbol is displayed. It is turned off when the stop type of the second special symbol in the device 81 is set (see S2611 in FIG. 57). When the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as is based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command. In this embodiment, the stop mode of the display displayed in the first display area Ds1 is set.

The performance counter 223g is a counter used for preview performances and various lottery games. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The slave state setting area 223h is a storage area for storing state information (any of states A to A to C) set by the main controller 110. When a status command output from the main controller 110 (S308 in FIG. 30, S708 in FIG. 36, S1808 in FIG. 49) is received, status information indicated by the status command is stored in the slave status setting area 223h. (S2210 in FIG. 53). With this configuration, the same state can be set in the audio lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the state set in the main control device 110.

The special symbol 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is a counter for measuring the remaining variation time of the first special symbol. When this special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i receives a special figure 1 variation pattern command, the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern command is set as the remaining variation time (see S2310 in FIG. 54). When the remaining variation time is set in the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i (special figure 1 remaining variation time > 0), the counter value corresponding to the elapsed time ( In this embodiment, 1) is subtracted and updated (see S2702 in FIG. 58). In addition, this special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time counter 223i is set to 0 in an initial state.

The special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. This special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j determines the remaining variation time (the value of the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i) of the first special symbol that is changing when the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received. , If the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the selected second special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is set in the special symbol 2 remaining variation time counter 223j. Set. On the other hand, when the variation time of the selected second special symbol is shorter than the remaining variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time of the selected second special symbol is set in the special symbol 2 remaining variation time counter 223j. By configuring in this way, even if the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped when the small hit of the first special symbol is executed, the accurate second special symbol can be changed. You can set the remaining fluctuation time. In addition, the value of this special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j is used to determine the variation time of the fusion effect when selecting the fusion effect. In this case as well, since the accurate remaining fluctuation time at which the second special symbol stops fluctuating is set in the special symbol 2 residual fluctuation time counter 223j, the first special symbol and the second special symbol each stop the fusion performance. You can set a fusion effect with variable time to match the timing.

The fusion effect start flag 223k is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the fusion effect. This fusion performance start flag 223k is set to ON when the special symbol 2 variation pattern command for the second special symbol is received and the lottery result is a small hit (S2405 in FIG. 55). On the other hand, when a display fusion effect command indicating the display mode (fusion effect pattern) of the selected fusion effect is set, it is set to OFF (S2609 in FIG. 57). Note that this fusion effect start flag 223k is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial settings such as when the power is turned on.

The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. Note that the command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 81) of the voice ramp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

In this way, in this embodiment, based on receiving the variation pattern command for the first special symbol and the second special symbol output from the main controller 110, the respective third symbols are displayed in a variable manner, The fusion performance is selected and executed in accordance with the timing when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate and the period until the timing when the second special symbol stops fluctuating. As a result, the small winning of this embodiment is a configuration in which the small winning is drawn with a high probability (both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 398/399), and the small winning of the first special symbol is frequently executed. Even if there is a game, the fusion effect is displayed so that the player can judge whether it is time to play the game with anticipation, and can play the game in a meaningful way. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the performance indicating that a small win of the first special symbol is executed is frequently executed, and it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored.

In addition, the gameplay of this embodiment is such that when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner as a result of a small winning lottery, the small winning of the special symbol stops after the variable time has elapsed first. is executed. The small win of the second special symbol is set to be a more advantageous small win than the small win of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops before the first special symbol, which is advantageous to the player. A state (a state in which a small hit of the second special symbol is executed) can be provided. However, it is difficult to identify from the third symbol whether or not the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops first, which also reduces the interest of the game. In this embodiment, the variation of the fusion effect is started in accordance with the timing of the start of variation of the second special symbol, and a race between a rabbit and a turtle is used to notify whether or not the variation of the second special symbol will stop first. did. By doing this, the player can watch the fusion performance without having to simultaneously monitor the fluctuations of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol and determine the type of special symbol to be stopped first. You can learn about the special symbols that will stop first. Therefore, even if the game is complicated, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner with easy effects.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. It controls the performance (performance) and preview performance. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 70).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111 when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will be difficult to read out the instructions constituting the control program. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, read operations are performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the second predetermined location is the initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 59) that is executed after the boot process (see S2801 in FIG. 59) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the image in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 61(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which has a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b is used when a player starts a game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball entering the first winning hole 64a is detected. In this case, this is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 using a variation effect.

The MPU 231 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply section 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 59).

The image that fluctuates when the power is turned on will be explained. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 transfers the power-on main image to the third symbol display device using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a. 81 (the third symbol display device 81 displays "○" and "x").

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen, a power-on fluctuation image with an "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and a power-on fluctuation image with an "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, are displayed during the fluctuation period. In the middle, the display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery held in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a ``special symbol jackpot'', the image is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the variable performance, and if it is a ``miss of the special symbol'', the image is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable performance is stopped.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. I can do it.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, if the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, the power-on variation image The image controller 237 is sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so that the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the area 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. are instructed to. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. I can do it.

Returning to FIG. 21, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable presentation after the ball enters the first winning hole 64a, the third symbol display device 81 does not immediately start the variable presentation. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character pattern area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but changes it to the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading resident image data in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back side of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 235f, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for rendering processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, round presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , ending effects, and demo effects are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss will finally be displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

By notifying the time period of the normal symbol in the ending performance, the player can easily recognize the time period of the normal symbol. The longer the time period for this normal symbol, the more chances the ball will pass through the through gate 67, the more opportunities the lottery for the normal symbol will take place, and the more opportunities for the normal symbol to win. Therefore, there are more opportunities for the electric accessory to be released due to the jackpot of the normal symbol, making it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 64b, and making it easier for the special symbol to be drawn. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot, and the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot.This increases the player's desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first winning hole 64a is a winning hole from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a jackpot with a normal symbol, and the ball is sent to the second winning hole. If it becomes easier to enter 64b, the number of prize balls will increase. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to reduce or the number of balls it has does not decrease even if it plays a game, so the player is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to decrease or the number of balls it has is You can get a feeling of expectation that you can get a jackpot with a special symbol even if you don't have one. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending performance, by informing that the lottery result of one of the pending special symbol drawings will be a special symbol jackpot, the player can win the special symbol in the pending special symbol drawing. Since the player can recognize that it will be a jackpot with a special symbol, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player will definitely get a jackpot with a special symbol. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. If the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of back surface is to display either back surface A to C that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or to display back surface A to C that corresponds to the stage selected by the player. Information specifying whether a back image different from C is to be displayed is described. Furthermore, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A to C is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

If it is specified that any of the back faces A to C is to be displayed based on the back type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the drawing target. , and also specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information by the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current fluctuating performance, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is being displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the last address of the display data table (in the example of FIG. 25) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the processing of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each production mode in this way, and the display data table buffer 233d is set according to the production mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is read frame by frame according to the set data table. can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, the display data table buffer 233d is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be created can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery conducted based on the start-up winnings. .

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each production, and as mentioned above, among the image data of sprites used in the production specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all of the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 26). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined in association with an address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning .

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 26, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 26, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (a power-on main image and a power-on variable image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2805 in FIG. 59). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 72(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3101 in FIG. 61(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 61(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S3108 in FIG. 61(b) S3109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 62 to 68) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 69 to 71) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 72(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 73) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated in which instructions for image drawing are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and writes an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (In other words, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 61(b ), pointer update processing (see S4305 in FIG. 69) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 27), and obtains the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Pattern 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite (design) is described for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The rendered image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , pending pitch number symbol 1, pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , error symbol), and detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in this order.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 61(b) is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of the image for one frame is completed. ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4307 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2802 in FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 73). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 73). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k specifies a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S4902 in FIG. 74).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 61(b)) is executed (see S4902 in FIG. 74).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the V winning switch 65e3, the jackpot game is awarded after the small win D ends, but the probability of jackpot is not limited to this, and the probability of jackpot is the normal probability (1/399 ) The high probability state (probability variation: e.g. 1/39) set higher than It may be configured to set up to a period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that provides a probability change.

<About the control process executed by the main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 50. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, 299, 99, 99, 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). The details of this special symbol variation process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

After executing the special symbol variation process, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and a process for passing the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 are executed for a normal symbol variation process. (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. After executing the normal symbol variation process, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process starts when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be explained. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104) performs various judgments and decisions on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on each acquired counter value, and displays the determined variation based on predetermined control. In this manner, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled to enable variable display at the same time, or are controlled to be stopped and displayed in a display mode that shows the determination result. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game or a small win game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that there is a big hit or a small hit (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot or a small win (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). If it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202: Yes), a first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner has elapsed, a process that stops the variable display with a symbol that indicates the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. be done. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), the second special symbol is stopped fluctuating at a symbol indicating a jackpot (or small win), and a jackpot game (or small win game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, a process for forcibly stopping the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol is a symbol indicating a jackpot (or a small win) and the variation is stopped, the variation of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Further, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot, an extremely short variation time is selected so as not to be forced to stop due to the variation of the other. ing. As a result, it is possible to configure such that the judgment of a jackpot is not forcibly stopped and the lottery result that is a loss is not forcibly stopped and displayed. Details of this first special symbol variation stop processing (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S202: No), a first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). In the first special symbol variation start process (S203), a process related to the start of variation of the first special symbol is executed. This first special symbol variation start process (S203) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32.

After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) or the second special symbol variation stop process (S204) is executed, it is determined whether the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S205). If it is determined that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S205: Yes), a second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the second special symbol that is being displayed fluctuating has elapsed, , a process of stopping the variable display at the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is executed. Details of this second special symbol variation stop processing (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S205: No), a second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). In the second special symbol variation start process (S206), the process necessary to start the variation of the second special symbol is executed. This second special symbol variation start process (S206) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation start process (S203).

In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203), first, it is determined whether or not there is a win in the first winning hole 64a (S301). If there is no prize in the first prize winning hole 64a (S301: No), this process is ended as is. If there is a prize in the first winning hole 64a (S301: Yes), then each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a. (S302).

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S303). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303) will be described in detail later, but the gaming state is set based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a. Based on this, a judgment such as a big hit or a small hit is executed. The details of this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303) will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S304). In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), a variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the result of the validity judgment based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a. Processing for selection is performed based on each counter value. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 32.

After the first symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), 1 is subtracted from the value of the state counter 203k (S305), and it is determined whether the value of the state counter 203k is greater than 0 (S306). If the value of the status counter 203k is greater than 0 (S306: Yes), the process is immediately terminated. If the value of the state counter 203k is 0 (S306: No), then state A is set in the state setting area 203m (S307), a state command indicating state A is set (S308), and then this processing is performed. end.

In this way, in this embodiment, the value of the state counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol starts changing, and when the state counter 203k becomes 0, state A, which is the initial state (normal state), is set. be done. As a result, if state B or state C is set, the value of the state counter becomes 0, and state A is automatically set. As a result, by changing the state depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and switching the fluctuation pattern selection table for the second special symbol's small win, it is possible to give the player an advantageous state for a certain period of time with easy control. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203), will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S303).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol execution area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, based on the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 14(a)), the lottery result is obtained based on whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value (S402). Here, as shown in FIG. 14(a), "399" is set as the jackpot determination value for the value of the first random number counter C1, and "0 to 398" is set as the small hit determination value. ing. That is, in this embodiment, if it is not a big hit, it is determined that all the winnings are small wins.

It is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S403), and if the lottery result is a jackpot (S403: Yes), the jackpot flag 203f is set to ON for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S404). , the special symbol 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is set as a jackpot (S405), and the first special symbol is a jackpot displayed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the value of the acquired winning type counter. The symbols are set (S406), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S403, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot, that is, a small hit (S403: No), the special drawing 1 small winning flag 203i is set to on (S407), and the special drawing 1 small winning flag 203i is set to on (S407). The lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is set as a small win (S408), the small prize symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and then this process is performed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S304).

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S304), first, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired (S501), and then, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303), the first It is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether the jackpot flag is set on for the first special symbol (S502).

In the process of S502, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S502: Yes), a jackpot variation pattern is selected based on the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 (S503). , the process moves to step S505. In the process of S503, one of the special drawing 1 jackpot fluctuation patterns A to C is selected based on the winning fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 15(c)) and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a jackpot (that is, the jackpot flag 203f for the first special symbol is off) (S502: No), the obtained fluctuation type counter Based on the value of CS1, a small winning variation pattern is selected from the set small winning variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 16(a)) (S504), and then the process moves to S505. In the process of S505, a special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating the selected variation pattern is generated (S505), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation stop processing (S204).

In the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 33, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601). In the process of S601, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: Yes), the jackpot flag 203f is turned on for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). It is determined whether it is set (S602). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203f is set on for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set on (S603). Although not shown, when the process of S603 is executed, a special figure 2 variation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203h has been turned on is set.

When the process of S603 is finished, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S604). Then, a jackpot scenario is set based on the selected jackpot type (S605). After that, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol (S606). Then, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 37 (S607), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the jackpot flag 203f is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S602: No), the special symbol 1 small hit stop process is executed (S610), and this process is immediately terminated. do. In this special figure 1 small hit stop processing (S610), a process related to stopping the first special symbol corresponding to the small win of the determination result is executed. In addition, this special figure 1 small winning stop process (S610) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 35.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: No), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 variation stop flag 203g is on. It is determined (S608). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is off in the process of S608 (S608: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203g is on in the process of S608 (S608: Yes), this means that the second special symbol has been stopped due to a jackpot or a small prize. In order to stop the variation based on the 1 special symbol, special symbol 1 forced stop processing is executed (S609). The details of this special figure 1 forced stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

In this way, in the first special symbol stop process (S204), when the prescribed variation time of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner has elapsed (S601: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is Processing to stop the variable display (S603 to S609 or S612) is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped fluctuating at a symbol indicating a jackpot (or small win) and the jackpot game (or small win game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the fluctuating display A process (S612) for forcibly stopping the first special symbol is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is a symbol indicating a jackpot (or small win) and is stopped from fluctuating (S610: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol that is being fluctuated is interrupted (temporarily stopped). You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special symbol 1 forced stop process (S609), which is one process of the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 33, S204), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this special figure 1 forced stop processing (S609).

In the special figure 1 forced stop processing (FIG. 34, S609), first, the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203g is set to OFF (S611), and then the special figure 1 variation indicating that the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203g is set to OFF. A stop command is set (S612). Then, the variation type of the first special symbol is set to miss (S613), the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped fluctuating at the miss symbol (S614), and the special symbol 1 confirmation command of the first special symbol is issued. After setting (S615), this process ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is turned on (timing at which the fluctuation that results in a big hit or small hit with the second special symbol stops), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is Even if the process is in progress, it will be forcibly stopped as a result of a failure determination. Thereby, even if the lottery results are displayed variably using the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, it is only necessary to execute a small win or a big win for only one of the lottery results, and the gambling nature can be suppressed. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the special symbol 1 small winning stop process (S610), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 33, S204), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this special drawing 1 small winning stop processing (S610).

In the special figure 1 small hit stop processing (FIG. 35, S610), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to ON (S621), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is set to ON, which indicates that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203h is turned on. A fluctuation stop command is set (S622). Then, a small winning scenario corresponding to the selected small winning type is set (S623), a confirmation command for the first special symbol is set (S624), and the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is set. After stopping (S625), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIGS. 36 to 38 are flowcharts showing this second special symbol variation start process (S206).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 36, S206), the process for the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol, in contrast to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 30, S203) described above. The only difference is that the process for the second special symbol is changed to the first special symbol, and the other processes are the same, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 36, S206), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S703).

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 37, S703) differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S303) described above in the following points. In the process of S801 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol execution area 203a is changed to the second special symbol execution area 203b, and in each process of S804 to S809 corresponding to each process of S404 to S409. , are different in that special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to special figure 2 (second special symbol). Since the other points are the same, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 26, S206), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S704).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 38, S704) differs from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S304) described above in the following points. In the process of S902 corresponding to the process of S502, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S503 to S505 Each of the processes of S903 to S905 corresponding to the previous processes is different in that the special figure 1 variation pattern command (the first special symbol variation pattern command) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 29, S104), will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation stop processing (S207). The second special symbol variation stop process (S207) differs from the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 33, S204) described above in the following points. In the process of S912 corresponding to the process of S602, "for special figure 1" is changed to "for special figure 2", and in the process of S913 corresponding to the process of S603, special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag, the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command in the process of S1914 corresponding to the process of S604, and the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command in S608. In the process of S918 corresponding to the process, the special figure 1 variation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 variation stop flag, and in the process of S917 corresponding to the process of S607, the variation stop of the first special symbol is changed to the second The point is that the special symbol is changed to a stop of fluctuation, the special symbol 1 forced stop processing is changed to the special symbol 2 forced stop processing in the process of S919 corresponding to the process of S609, and 920 that corresponds to the process of S610. The processing differs in that the special figure 1 small winning stop processing is changed to the special drawing 2 small winning stopping process. Since other points are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In addition, the special symbol 2 forced stop processing (S919 in FIG. 39, see FIG. 40(a)) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 39) and the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 39) The special figure 2 small hit stop process (see S920 in FIG. 39, FIG. 40(b)) executed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 forced stop process (see FIG. 34) and the special figure 1 small hit stop process (see FIG. 34) Since the same process as the stop process (see FIG. 35) is executed on the second special symbol, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time. can be done. Therefore, more special symbol lottery games can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a jackpot will be awarded to a player within a predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Furthermore, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a fluctuating manner at the same time and a lottery game is executed, if a jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the fluctuating display of the special symbols is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on playing the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a stop display of a jackpot or a small win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or fluctuatingly displayed while measurement of the fluctuating time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of a variable display disappears. It is possible to know that the player is not playing a jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 632, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting. (S1001). The period during which the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning includes the period from when the second symbol display device (not shown) displays a winning symbol to when the electric accessory 632 is being controlled to open and close. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the winning state (S1001: Yes), the present process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1001: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol on the second symbol display device is being displayed in a variable manner (S1002). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1002: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S1011 ). Note that the variation time here is a time that is preset by the process of S1009, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit (not shown).

In the process of S1011, if the variable time has not elapsed (S1011: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1011, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being fluctuatedly displayed has elapsed (S1011: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1012). In the process of S1012, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S1007, the "○" symbol is stopped as the second symbol on the second symbol display device (not shown). It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode at the time of loss is set by the process of S1010, an "X" symbol will be displayed on the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol. It is set so that it is displayed as stopped (lit display). When the stop display is set in the process of S1012, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed as the second symbol in the display mode set in the process of S1007 and S1009. A stop display (lit display) is displayed on the symbol display device.

Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit (S1013). When it is determined that the lottery result of this normal symbol is a hit (S1013: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 632 is set (S1014). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result of the normal symbol is a loss (S1013: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, if it is determined that the normal symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner (S1002: No), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S1003). If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S1003: No), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the value of the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 are respectively stored in the normal pattern execution area 203c. (S1004). A determination is made as to whether the second winning random number value obtained based on the random number table 202b is correct (S1005). It is determined whether the lottery result in S1005 is a win (S1006). If it is determined that the lottery result in S1005 is a win (S1006: Yes), a display mode at the time of a win is set (S1007). The opening time of the electric accessory 64b1 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 1 (S1008). Thereafter, the variation time of the second symbol is selected based on the common symbol variation type counter CS2 and the common symbol variation pattern table 202g obtained in the process of S1004 (S1009). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1006, if it is determined that the second symbol is out, a display mode when the second symbol is out is set (S1010), and then, after executing the process of S1009, this process is ended.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1101), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout firing control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 43), first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S1202). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1203).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1204), and if it is turned on (S1204: Yes), the process moves to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1204: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1205); (S1205: No), since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S1512 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1205: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1206), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1207: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S1512 in such a case. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1212, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1212). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start payout control of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1213, S1514).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1213, S1214) is executed.

In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1213, S1214) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1213, S1214), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1213), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1214). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S1210.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1204: No), information on the occurrence of power outage is stored (S1205: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is If it is normal (S1207: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1208). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S1209), and the process moves to S1210. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it enters a state where it can start payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit execution of various effects (S1210). After that, interrupts are permitted (S1211). Then, the process moves to main processing (S1600), which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the main processing (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup processing will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S1600). This main processing (see FIG. 44) is roughly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main processing (see FIG. 44), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is sent to each sub-side control. External output processing to be sent to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1301).

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1302). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1303). Jackpot control processing is executed (S1304). Regarding this jackpot control process (S1304), the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but a process for setting the operation of the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the jackpot game process (S1304) is executed, the small win control process (S1305) is executed. In this small win control process (S1305), a process for setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 in the small win game is executed. This small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After that, electric accessory opening/closing processing is executed (S1306). In this electric accessory opening/closing process (S1306), opening/closing processing of the normal electric accessory 64b1 is executed. After that, display control processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S3607).

Next, the second symbol display device 83 executes a display control process for a second symbol (for example, a "○" or "x" symbol) (S1308). Briefly, on the condition that the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the value is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display of the second symbol is performed. Then, a lottery of the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol becomes a winning state, the normal electric accessory 64b1 is opened for a predetermined time.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1309), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1309: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1309). ), if the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S1309: Yes), the process moves to S1310, and each process from S1301 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous main processing (S1310: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated.

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1311). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S1301 (S1312).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1301 to S1308 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1308, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1309: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 42 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S1313 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1313), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S1314). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S1315), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1316), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S1319 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S1301 to S1308, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S1311 and S1312 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. It can start from the process of S1251. That is, the process can be started from the process in S1201, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S1201). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1301. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45, the jackpot control process (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1304). This jackpot control process (S1304) is executed during the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it can perform various effects according to the jackpot, or This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 650a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario has been set (S1621). If it is determined that a jackpot scenario has been set (S1401: Yes), the pointer of the set jackpot scenario is updated (S1402). Here, in the jackpot scenario, processes specified for pointers that are updated in chronological order are respectively set, and processes necessary for the jackpot game are set in chronological order.

It is determined whether the data of the jackpot scenario indicated by the updated pointer indicates the timing to start the jackpot game (S1403). The jackpot start is data that is set when the pointer is first updated after the jackpot scenario is set. If it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing (S1403: Yes), an opening command is set (S1404). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1403, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start a jackpot (S1403: No), it is determined whether data indicating that it is the timing to start a new round is set (S1405). If it is determined that data indicating the start of a new round has been set (S1405: Yes), the second variable winning device 650 is set to be opened (S1406). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1405 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1405: No), it is determined whether the data indicates the end timing of the round (S1407). If it is determined that the data indicates the end timing of the round (S1407: Yes), closing of the second variable winning device 650 is set (S1408). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that the data does not indicate the end timing of a round (S1407: No), it is determined whether the data indicates the ending timing (S1409). If it is determined that the data indicates the start timing of the ending (S1409: Yes), a display command indicating the display mode of the ending is set (S1410), the set jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411), After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that the data does not indicate the start timing of the ending (S1409: No), the first winning process is executed (S1412).

Here, with reference to FIG. 46, the first winning process (FIG. 46, S1412), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 45, S1304) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the contents of this first winning process (S1412). In this first winning process (S1412), the number of balls hit by the second variable winning device 650 during the round is counted, and the corresponding control logic is executed.

In the first winning process (FIG. 46, S1412), first, it is determined whether the data of the jackpot scenario indicated by the pointer corresponds to the round period (S1501). If it is determined that the round period is not in progress (S1501: No), the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1502). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is during the round period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second specific winning hole 650a (S1503). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second specific winning hole 650a (S1503: Yes), the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is updated by adding 1 (S1504). It is determined whether the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is greater than or equal to an upper limit value (10 balls in this embodiment) (S1505). If it is determined that the value of the second winning counter 203d2 is less than the upper limit value (S1505: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second prize winning counter 203d2 is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (S1505: Yes), the second variable winning prize device 650 is set to the closed state (S1506). The pointer of the jackpot scenario is updated to the position indicating the data corresponding to the end of the round (S1507), and then this process is ended. In this way, in this embodiment, the end condition for one round is until 10 balls have entered or until 30 seconds have elapsed during the open period, but based on the determination that 10 balls have entered, the jackpot scenario is By updating the pointer at the end of the round, it is possible to immediately set the end of the round when 10 balls are won and move on to processing related to the subsequent jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the small hit control process (S1305), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the details of this small hit control process (S1305). In the small winning control process (S1305), opening control of the first variable winning device 65 in the small winning game, etc. are executed.

In the small win control process (FIG. 47, S1305), first, it is determined whether a small win scenario is set (S1601). If it is determined that the small winning scenario has not been set (S1601: No), this process ends. If it is determined that a small winning scenario has been set (S1601: Yes), the small winning scenario pointer is updated by 1 (S1602). Here, the small winning scenario is set for each small winning type, and the processing related to the first variable winning device 65 executed in each small winning game is set in chronological order with respect to the pointer.

It is determined whether the small winning scenario data indicated by the updated pointer corresponds to the start timing of the small winning game (S1603). If it is determined that the data corresponds to the start timing of the small winning game (S1603: Yes), an opening command indicating the start of the small winning game is set (S1604). After that, this process ends. In this embodiment, the opening of the small winning game is displayed in the display mode shown in FIGS. 7(a) to 7(b).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start time of the small winning game (S1603: No), it is determined whether it is the start time of a new round (S1605). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1605: Yes), a small winning operation setting process is executed (S1606). In this small winning operation setting process (1606), the operation timing of the flow path solenoid 65k (the solenoid that operates the switching member 65h) of the first variable winning device 65 and the operation timing of the opening/closing door 65f are respectively set. The details of this small winning operation setting process (S1606) will be explained with reference to FIG. 48.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small winning operation setting process (S1606) which is one process in the small winning control process (S1305 in FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the small winning operation setting process (S1656), first, the opening operation data of the first variable winning device 65 corresponding to the small winning type is read from the small winning scenario (S1701). The opening operation data read here includes the opening timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 and the operation timing of the flow path solenoid 65k.

Based on the opening operation data read in S1701, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k is set (S1702). The operation of the flow path solenoid 65k is set from turning on the solenoid to turning it off. The opening operation (opening timing) of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set (S1703). After that, this process ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, the operation of the flow path solenoid and the opening/closing door 65f1 corresponding to the small winning type are respectively set. Thereby, it is possible to easily switch and set the opening operation that allows the ball to enter the V winning switch 65e3 and the opening operation that makes it difficult (or impossible) to enter the ball into the V winning switch 65e3.

In this embodiment, in small wins A to D (all small wins), the guide piece 65h2 turns on the flow path solenoid 65k to the open state shown in FIG. 10(a) for 2 seconds from the start of the small win game. It can be switched by On the other hand, the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 becomes open 2 seconds after the start of the small winning game for small winnings A to C, and at that time, the guiding piece 65h2 is switched to the closed state, so that the special winning The game ball won in the opening 65a cannot be guided to the specific outlet 65e2. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is set to be impossible (difficult) to win.

On the other hand, in small win D, the opening/closing door 65f1 is open for 1 second from the start of the small win game, then closed for 0.2 seconds (interval period between the next round), and then opened/closed again for 1 second. The door 65f1 is in an open state. As a result, when a game ball enters the special entrance ball opening 65a in the open state in the small hit D, the guidance piece 65h2 is set in the open state, so the game ball is sent to the special discharge port 65e2 by the guidance piece 65h2. is induced and a prize is entered in the V winning switch 65e3. As a result, after the small win D, the start of the jackpot game is executed.

Returning to FIG. 47, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1607, if it is determined that it is not the start time of a new round (S1605: No), it is determined whether it is the time to end the round (the 2 second open period has elapsed) (S1607). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the round (S1607: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set to close (S1608). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1607, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the round (S1607: No), it is determined whether it is the timing for the ending (S1609). If it is determined that it is the ending timing (S1609: Yes), a small winning ending process is executed (S1610). The small winning ending process (S1610) will be described later with reference to FIG. 49, but at the end of the small winning game, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small winning game, and the passing If so, control processing such as jackpot game settings is executed.

With reference to FIG. 49, the small winning ending process (S1610) which is one process in the small winning control process (FIG. 47, S1305) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small winning ending process (S1610).

In the small winning ending process (FIG. 49, S1610), first, a small winning ending command is set (S1801). It is determined whether the V winning flag 203e is set to on (S1802). Here, the V winning flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small winning game, and is a flag that indicates whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the small winning game, and is a flag that indicates the second winning that is executed in the small winning control process (S1305) to be described later. In the process (FIG. 50, S1611), when it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is on, that is, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3, this V winning flag 203e is set to on. Ru.

In the process of S1802, if it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is on (S1802: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to jackpot A is set (S1803). The V winning flag 203e is set to OFF (S1804), and then the process of S1805 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1802, if it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is off (S1802: No), the process of S1805 is executed. In the process of S1805, the state (state A to state C) corresponding to the small winning type executed this time is set in the state setting area 203m (S1805). The value of the state counter corresponding to the set state is set in the state counter 203k (S1806).

The state corresponding to the small win type set here is set based on the post-small win state set in the small win type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14(d)). Further, the value of the state counter corresponding to each small win is set based on the value of the number of state transitions set in the state transition table 202e (see FIG. 15(a)). After S1806 is executed, a state command corresponding to the set state is set (S1807).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the small hit D of the second special symbol is executed, the configuration is such that state C, which is the most advantageous state, is set. Therefore, even after the small win D is executed and the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 and the jackpot game is executed, the state C that is advantageous to the player is set, so the small win D becomes easier to execute. , it is possible to increase the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed. Furthermore, even if the game ball cannot be passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the execution of the small hit D, the state C will be set after the small win D, so it is expected that the small win D will be executed again. It is possible to make the players have this feeling, and it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the players' desire to play the game.

Returning to FIG. 47, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1609, if it is determined that it is not the ending timing, a second winning process is executed (S1611). After that, this process ends. The second winning process (S1611) will be described later with reference to FIG. 50, but a process related to the entry of the game ball into the first variable winning device 65 is executed.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second winning process (S1661) which is one process in the small winning control process (S1305 in FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the second winning process (S1661), first, it is determined whether the data indicated by the pointer of the small win scenario is within the round validity period (S1901). The valid period of the round is the period from when the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened to when the closing condition is satisfied and closed until the game ball that entered the first variable prize winning device 65 is ejected. This is the period including the brushing time. In this embodiment, the ball brushing period is set to 2 seconds.

In S1901, if it is determined that the round is in the valid period (S1901: Yes), the first winning counter 203d1 is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1902). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1901, when it is determined that the round validity period is outside (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first specific winning hole 65a (S1903). If it is determined that no game ball has entered the first specific winning hole 65a (S1903: NO), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball has entered the first specific ball entrance 65a (S1903: Yes), the first winning counter 203d1 is updated by adding one. It is determined whether the first winning counter 203d1 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (10 balls in this embodiment) (S1905). If it is determined that the value of the first winning counter 203d1 is less than the upper limit value, the process of S1908 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first prize winning counter 203d1 is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (S1905: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 is set to close (S1906). The small win scenario pointer is updated to the position of the data indicating the end timing of the round (S1907). After that, the process of S1908 is executed.

In the process of S1908, it is determined whether the V winning flag 203e is on (S1908). If the V winning flag 203e is on (S1908: Yes), the game ball has already passed the V winning switch 65e3 (the right to execute the big winning game has been acquired in the small winning game), so this process is performed. end. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is off (S1908: No), it is determined whether the V winning switch 65e3 is on, that is, the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 (S1909). If it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is off (S1909: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning switch 65e3 is on (S1909: Yes), the V winning flag 203e is set to ON (S1910), and the V winning command is set (S1911). After that, this process ends. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this V winning command, a notification mode indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 is set. In this embodiment, the letter "V" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the sound effect "Kuin" is output, and the corresponding lamp is lit.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 58. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 51, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When start-up processing is executed, first, initial setting processing associated with power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off process in S2117 (see Figure 52). ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 52, upon receiving power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S2114 in FIG. 52), the audio lamp control device 113 executes power-off processing in S2117. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2117 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S2117 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2003. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process moves to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process moves to S2008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process moves to S2004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2117 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process moves to S2008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S2117, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2117 is executed (see FIG. 52, S2116). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2117 is executed, so the reason why the process in S2008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S2009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), the interrupt Permission is set (S2011) and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S2008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S2004 to S2006 and then S2008. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process skips S2009, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, moves to S2010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010).

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S2009 is skipped is because if the process has reached S2008 from S2004 via the process in S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2004. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the working area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or the previous process (S2101: Yes) was executed (S2101). , if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is the process of S2102 to S2110 related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S2111 and the variable display setting process in S2112 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110. By executing the process in S2111 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S2103 to S2112 are sent to the display control device 114 ( S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108, which will be described later (S2103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S2105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting performance, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device. 114.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/production processing, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is then executed (S2108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, a liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S2110). After this, the process moves to S2111. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

After that, a fluctuation time measurement process for measuring the remaining fluctuation time of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed (S2111). This variation time measurement process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 58, but the process of subtracting and updating the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in accordance with the passage of time is performed. Execute.

When the process of S2111 is executed, a command determination process (S2112) is executed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process moves to S2113. Details of this command determination process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

In the process of S2113, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. Execute the variable display setting process, which is the process to set up to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

When the process of S2113 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off process is executed (S2117). After executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the command determination process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2112). This command determination process (S2112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. . The details of the command determination process (S2112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 53, S2112), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out and analyzed. It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner, and is mainly a command for specifying the variation time of the first special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), special figure 1 variation start processing is executed to display the first special symbol in a variable manner (S2202). The details of this special symbol 1 variation start process (S2202) will be explained with reference to FIG. is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 54, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S2202) will be explained. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special figure 1 variation start process (S2202). In the special figure 1 variation start process (FIG. 54, S2202), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is first set to ON (S2301), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command. Extract (S2302). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so that it can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113) to be described later. It is used when setting a first special symbol display variation pattern command that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the first special symbol variation display performance and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. Based on the variation pattern type, it is possible to determine the success/failure determination result (small win or big win).

When the process of S2302 is executed, the variation time (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) indicated by the received variation pattern command is determined (S2303). It is determined whether the lottery result indicated by the received variation pattern command is a small win (S2304). It is determined whether the lottery result is a small win of the first special symbol (S2304). If the lottery result is not a small win, that is, a big win (S2304: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S2304: Yes), the fusion performance start flag 223k is set to ON (S2305). It is determined whether the second special symbol is stopped (S2306). If it is determined that the variation of the second special symbol is stopped (S2306: Yes), based on the variation time of the first special symbol and the production counter 223g, the preparation production selection table in the fusion production selection table 222b is determined. The production in preparation is selected from 222b3 (S2307). After that, the process of S2310 is executed.

Here, in the configuration of this embodiment, the first special symbol always starts changing first. Therefore, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, it indicates that the state is normal. Further, in the performance display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed, a variable display of the fusion performance is started. During a period when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and the second special symbol stops fluctuating, the fusion performance before the competition starts (before the start) shown in FIG. 4(a) is displayed. Here, in the preparation production selection table 222b3 in the fusion production selection table 222b, a plurality of types of fusion production before starting the competition as shown in FIG. 4(a) are set. A value of a performance counter 223g is assigned to each fusion performance before starting a plurality of competitions, and a corresponding fusion performance is selected based on the obtained value of the performance counter 223g. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of fusion effects before the competition starts, and it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored. Note that this pre-competition fusion effect consists of a display mode for, for example, 5 seconds, and is repeatedly set until a new fusion effect is set or a new display mode is set on the third symbol display device 81. Ru.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fusion performance before the competition is configured to be selected based on the value of the performance counter 223g, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols from the fusion performance before the race, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols that is advantageous to the player (in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (0 It is possible to notify the player that the .5 second variation pattern)) has been selected. Furthermore, by switching the type of fusion performance selected depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 64b1 becomes open and the game ball can enter the second prize opening 64b. This can prevent the player from stopping firing and missing the chance to win a prize in the second prize opening 64b.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol is changing (S2306: No), the special performance selection table in the fusion performance selection table 222b is determined based on the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the value of the performance counter. A special effect is set from 222b4 (S2308). An abnormal fluctuation command is set (S2309), and then the process of S2310 is executed.

Here, if the second special symbol is already changing when the first special symbol starts changing, it is an abnormal state in the configuration of this embodiment. If the variation of the second special symbol has already started when the variation of the first special symbol starts, it is possible that the second special symbol may have already started to fluctuate before the game ball that enters the first prize opening 64a is entered into the prize (the through gate 67 and the first prize opening 64a) by stopping the game ball with a magnet or the like and then entering the game ball into the second prize opening 64b, or a game between the second prize opening 64b and the normal electric accessory 64b1. A case may be considered in which the ball gets caught and after a while the game ball enters the second winning hole 64b. In this case, the special performance displayed in the performance display area Ds3 is a performance in which the words "Winning Abnormality" are displayed. Additionally, an alarm sound is output to notify that an abnormality has occurred at the gaming parlor. In addition, a command indicating that there is an abnormal fluctuation (winning abnormality) is output to the hall computer from the external output terminal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol from changing before the first special symbol due to fraud or malfunction, or from causing only the second special symbol to change and displaying, which would cause a great disadvantage to the gaming parlor side. .

In the process of S2310, the special figure 1 remaining variation time is set in the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i based on the variation time of the first special symbol (S2310). After that, this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 53, the explanation will be continued. After the special figure 1 variation start process (FIG. 54, S2202) is executed, this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol that indicates a variable display mode for displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner. The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command mainly for notifying the validity determination result of the second special symbol and the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (S2203: Yes), special figure 2 variation start processing (S2204) is executed. The details of this special figure 2 variation start process (S2204) will be explained with reference to FIG. 55.

Here, with reference to FIG. 55, details of this special figure 2 variation start process (S2204) will be explained. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special figure 2 variation start process (S2204). In the special figure 2 variation start process (S2204), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is first set to ON (S2401), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command ( S2402). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so that it can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113) to be described later. It is used when setting a second special symbol display variation pattern command that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the second special symbol variation display performance and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

When the process of S2402 is executed, the variation time (dynamic display period) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is determined from the received variation pattern command (S2403). It is determined whether the lottery result indicated by the received variation pattern command is a small win (S2404). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S2404: Yes), the fusion performance start flag 223k is set to ON (S2405). It is determined whether the first special symbol is changing (S2406). If it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating (S2406: Yes), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 remaining fluctuation time). It is determined whether the time is long (S2407). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time is shorter than the variation time of special figure 2 (S2407: Yes), the first special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player stops first, and the small of the first special symbol Since a win is executed, a losing fusion performance is selected from the losing fusion performance selection table 222b2 of the fusion performance selection table 222b based on the special figure 1 remaining variation time and the performance counter 223g (S2408).

In this losing fusion performance, the competition start performance shown in FIG. 4(b) is displayed, and the rabbit winning performance shown in FIG. 5(a) is displayed in the performance display area Ds3 with the remaining variable time of the first special symbol. It is a performance that is performed. By displaying this effect in which the turtle loses, the player can recognize that the first special symbol will be stopped and displayed first. In addition, in the losing fusion performance selection table 222b2, a plurality of types of losing fusion performances are set corresponding to the value of the performance counter 223g. Therefore, the player can see a variety of performances, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early or from being able to predict the result of the performance before it is displayed.

After that, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set in the special symbol 2 remaining fluctuation time counter 223j as the residual fluctuation time of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 residual fluctuation time) based on the special symbol 1 residual fluctuation time (S2409). . After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2407, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 remaining variation time is longer than the variation time of the second special symbol (S2407: No), the variation time of special symbol 2 and the value of the production counter 223g are Based on this, a winning fusion performance is selected and set from the winning fusion performance selection table 222b1 of the fusion performance selection table 222b (S2410). The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set in the special symbol 1 remaining fluctuation time counter 223i (S2411). Thereafter, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set in the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j (S2412).

Here, if the second special symbol, which is determined as No in S2407, stops before the first special symbol, a small hit of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, as a fusion performance, a competition start performance shown in FIG. 4(b) is executed, and a winning fusion performance in which the turtle wins as shown in FIG. 5(b) as a competition result is selected in the second special symbol. Executes for a variable amount of time. Further, in this winning fusion performance, a plurality of types of winning fusion performances are set in the winning fusion performance selection table 222b1 in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223g. Therefore, it is possible to select a variety of winning fusion performances, and it is possible to provide a wide variety of performances to the players.

In addition, each winning fusion performance mentioned above has a winning performance set corresponding to the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and in the losing fusion performance, the fluctuation of the second special symbol starts from the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Each performance period is set by subtracting the minimum possible period (the period until the second special symbol starts changing at the earliest). In the losing fusion performance, the 3 seconds until the end is set on the blackout screen, and by adjusting the blackout display period depending on the timing when the second special symbol starts changing, the remaining fluctuation of the first special symbol can be adjusted. It is set according to the time.

In addition, in the process of S2406, if it is determined that the first special symbol is not fluctuating (S2413), it is an abnormal state in which only the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, so the fluctuation time and performance of the second special symbol A special effect is selected based on the value of the counter 223g (S2413). An abnormal fluctuation command indicating abnormal fluctuation is set (S2414). Thereafter, the process of S2412 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 53, the explanation will be continued. After executing the special figure 2 variation start process (S2204), this process is ended. If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2205). If it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S2205: Yes), a stop type command reception process is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be explained with reference to FIG. 56.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, according to the received command, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON. (S2501). The stop type (big hit A, small hit A to D, miss, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2502). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Each is stored in a way that allows identification of the stop type. After executing the process of S2502, this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 53, the explanation will be continued. After the stop type command receiving process (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, if it is determined that the special map 1 or special map 2 stop type command has not been received (S2205: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2209 ). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S2209: Yes), status information (any of status A to status C) indicated by the status command is set in the slave status setting area 223h (S2210). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2209 that the status command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether the V winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2211). If it is determined that the V winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2211: Yes), a V winning effect indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 is set (S2212). A display V winning effect command that instructs a V winning effect (displaying the letter "V" on the third symbol display device 81) is set (S2213). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2211, if it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether the special drawing 1 confirmation command or the special drawing 2 confirmation command has been received (S2214). If it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S2214: Yes), the display special figure 1 confirmation command (if the special figure 1 confirmation command is received) or the display special figure 2 A confirmation command (when the special map 2 confirmation command is received) is set (S2213). The special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i (when the special figure 1 confirmation command is received) or the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j (when the special figure 2 confirmation command is received) is reset to the initial value 0. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2214 that the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received (S2214: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S2217), and this Finish the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the variable display setting process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S2113). This variable display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113) is based on the first or special pattern 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of generating a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A, small hit A to D), a process of setting a display special map 1 or special map 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is performed. Execute.

In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 57, S2113), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2601). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c is off (S2601: No), it means that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2604 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c is on (S2601: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c is set to OFF (S2702).

Next, in the process of S2603, the variation pattern in the variation display performance of the first special symbol extracted from the special symbol 1 variation pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIG. 53, S2112) is stored in other memory areas of the RAM 223. 223z, and a variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S2603). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a display variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper two bits of the upper byte of the 2-byte display variation pattern command are "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it is compatible with .

The first special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S2603 is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52). The information is sent to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the first special symbol display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the corresponding special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the first special symbol variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the fluctuating display performance is started so that the fluctuating display of symbols is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2604). If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S2604: No), a state where the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S2607 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223d is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S2706). In the process of S2402 of the special figure 2 variation start process (FIG. 55, S2204), the variation pattern in the variation display performance of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Then, a variable pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is generated (S2606). Here, a variable display of "○" and "x" to be displayed in the second display area Ds2 is set.

The variable pattern command for displaying the second special symbol set in the process of S2606 is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 54). The information is sent to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the second special symbol display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the corresponding special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the second special symbol variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Next, it is determined whether the fusion effect start flag 223k is on (S2607). If it is determined that the fusion performance start flag 223k is on (S2607: Yes), it is the timing to set the fusion performance in the performance display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, so the fusion performance start flag 223k is turned off. (S2608), and a display fusion effect command indicating the selected fusion effect is set (S2609). After that, the process of S2610 is executed.

In the process of S2610, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON (S2610). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f are not set to on (that is, they are off) (S2610: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2709: Yes), if the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is on When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF, and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223f is set to OFF (S2612 ). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the fluctuation time measurement process (S2111), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the contents of this fluctuation time measurement process (S2111). In this variation time measurement process (S2111), a process of subtracting the remaining variation time of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the passage of time is executed.

It is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time counter 223i is greater than 0 (S2701). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i is a value greater than 0 (S2701: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 remaining variation time counter 223i and updated (S2702). After that, the process of S2703 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2701, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time counter 223i is 0 (S2701: No), the process of S2703 is executed.

In the process of S2703, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time counter 223j is a value greater than 0 (S2703). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j is a value greater than 0 (S2703: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 remaining variation time counter 223j is subtracted by 1 (S2704). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2703, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time counter 223j is 0 (S2703: No), this process is ended.

In this way, the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the residual fluctuation time of the second special symbol are subtracted and updated by about 1 ms corresponding to the counter value 1, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are accurate. It is possible to measure the remaining fluctuation time of the symbol.

In the configuration of the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection table at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol is switched depending on the small win type of the first special symbol, but the variation pattern selection table for the small win of the first special symbol is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the pattern selection table is switched. In this case, by switching to a variation pattern selection table in which a long variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, it can be set advantageously for the player. In addition, it may be configured to perform not only the small winning of the first special symbol but also a predetermined lottery (for example, every fluctuation, table switching lottery is executed with a predetermined probability). Further, the table for selecting the fluctuation time of the normal symbols may be configured to be switched depending on the small hit type of the first special symbol, the winning type of the normal symbol, etc. In this case, it can be advantageous for the player if the table is switched to a table where short normal symbol fluctuation times are more likely to be selected.

Further, in this embodiment, no reserved balls are set for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but a predetermined number (for example, 4 balls) of reserved balls are set for both or only one of them. You may. For example, by setting the reserved ball of the first special symbol, it is possible to efficiently change the first special symbol. Further, by setting a reserved ball for the second special symbol, the second special symbol can be efficiently varied. In addition, when setting a reserved ball as the second special symbol, it is preferable that the open period of the normal electric accessory 64b1 is set to the open state only once during the period when one game ball is entered. By configuring in this way, there is no difference between the number of reservations (number of prizes) of the first special symbol and the number of reservations (number of prizes) of the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the problem that only the second special symbol fluctuates.

<About the control process executed by the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 74. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 59, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration, and , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of a process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will recognize that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM 234d can operate at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2801), and the display control device 114 is activated so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start.

Here, the boot process (S2801) will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2801) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is slow especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2901). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S2902). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S2901.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S2902, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2902, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S2903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2904), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2802 in FIG. 59) (S2905), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S2801), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 60, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S2901. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2901 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2902. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S2903 to S2905 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2901 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a portion of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S2901, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process including steps S2902 and S2902 multiple times, the steps S2903 to S2905 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S2903 to S2905 without performing the processes of S2901 and S2902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 59. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2803). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S2803, the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2804). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S2804, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S2805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 72(a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S4602 in FIG. 72(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 61(b)), the simple command A determination process (see S3108 in FIG. 61(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S3109 in FIG. 61(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is being displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first prize opening 64a (starting prize), and an instruction to start the variable performance is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device. 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation images shown in FIGS. 23(b) and 23(c) are immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and the It is possible to perform variable effects. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Since it is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S2805, interrupt permission is set (S2806), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 61(a). FIG. 61(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt processing, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3001), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 61(b). FIG. 61(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 27) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 61(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so instead of the power-on image shown in FIG. 23, the normal effect is displayed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S3102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S3102), the contents of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68.

In the display setting process (S3103), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3102) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S3104). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S3103) or the simple display setting process (S3109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S3105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S3106). In this drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S3104), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S3105) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 27, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S3107 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (Jackpot A, Jackpot B, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete miss, chance) is detected. The stop type table and the stop symbol counter corresponding to the eye) are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101: Yes), this means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 23 on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S3108) is executed, and then a simple display setting process (S3109) is executed, and the steps in S3104 are executed. Move to processing.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S3102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68. First, FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 62, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3201: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S3103) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S3202), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S3203).

First, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3205), and the process returns to S3201.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S3205) will be described with reference to FIG. 63(a). FIG. 63(a) is a flowchart showing variable pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3301).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In the process of S3301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3301, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer is 233f is initialized to 0 (S3304), both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3305), and this process ends.

By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 63), in the display setting process, the variation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3301 is updated while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3304. The drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the display data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, it is transferred by the process of S3302. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the data table buffer 233e, and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data was set in the process of S3303 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 62. In the process of S3204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3204: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3206), If there is a display variation type command (S3206: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S3207), and the process returns to S3201.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S3207) will be described with reference to FIG. 63(b). FIG. 63(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back off reach, reach other than front/back off, complete miss, or chance) indicated by the display stop type command is created. (S3401), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61(b)) is executed, and displays the stop symbol on the third symbol display device. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S3402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S3402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to off (S3403), this stop type command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S3402 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S3104), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S3402 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S3403, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Incidentally, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S3402.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss, in reality, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 62, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3206: No), then it is determined whether there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3208), If there is a command (S3208: Yes), jackpot related command processing is executed (S3209), and the process returns to S3201.

Here, details of the jackpot related command processing (S3209) will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing jackpot related command processing (S3209). This jackpot-related command processing (S3209) is to execute processing corresponding to the jackpot-related commands (opening command for display, number of rounds for display command, ending command for display) received from the audio lamp control device 114.

In the jackpot related command processing, first, it is determined whether there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3501), and if there is an opening command for display (S3501: Yes), the opening command processing is executed. (S3502), and the process moves to S3503.

Here, details of the opening command processing (S3502) will be described with reference to FIG. 65(a). FIG. 65(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3601). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3604). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S3605), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 64, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3501, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3501: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3503), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S3503: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S3504), and the process moves to S3505.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S3504) will be described with reference to FIG. 65(b). FIG. 65(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3702).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3701, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S3705), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 64. In the process of S3503, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S3503: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3505), and the display command is If there is an ending command (S3505: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3506), and the process returns to S3201.

Here, details of the ending command process (S3506) will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3801). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3802).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3803). S3804). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S3805), the ending command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 62. In the process of S3208, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S3208: No), then it is determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3210), and the back image change is performed. If there is a command (S3210: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S3211), and the process returns to S3201.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S3211) will be described with reference to FIG. 67(a). FIG. 67(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag is set to on, which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 73) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state ( S3901). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3902), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3901 is turned on, the changed back image type is identified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S3902. . When the identified back image type is back B or back C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of back images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing (S3104), if it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C should be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S3902 is , the type of back image to be displayed at that point in time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified as time passes, and the RAM in which image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is stored. Specify the type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3902, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 62. In the process of S3210, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S3210: No), then it is determined whether there is a display fusion effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3212), and the display If there is a fused effect command (S3212: Yes), the fused effect command process is executed (S3213), and the process returns to S3201.

Here, details of the fusion effect command processing (S3213) will be explained with reference to FIG. 67(b). FIG. 67(b) is a flowchart showing the fusion effect command processing (S3213). This fusion effect command processing (S3213) is to execute processing corresponding to the display fusion effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the fusion effect command processing (S3213), first, a fusion effect display data table is determined based on the fusion effect command for display, and the determined fusion effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S4001). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S4002).

Then, based on the fused effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S4001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4004). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S4005), the fusion effect command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this way, when the display fusion effect command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the fusion effect command process (S3213) is executed, and the fusion effect (see FIGS. 4 to 7) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Ru. As described above, in this embodiment, when only the first special symbol is changing (the second special symbol is stopped), the display for displaying the preparation-in-progress (see FIG. 7(a)) as a fusion performance. The fusion effect command is notified from the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating, the fusion performance is a winning fusion performance (see Figures 4 and 5(b)) or a losing fusion performance (see Figures 4 and 5(b)). The display fusion effect command shown in FIG. 5(a) is notified from the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, a fusion effect corresponding to the fluctuation state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 62, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3212, if it is determined that there is no display fusion effect command (S3212: No), then it is determined whether there is a display V winning effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3214). If there is a display V winning effect command (S3214: Yes), the process executes the V winning effect command process (S3215) and returns to the process of S3201.

Here, details of the V winning presentation command process (S3215) will be explained with reference to FIG. 68(a). FIG. 68(a) is a flowchart showing the V winning presentation command process (S3215). This V winning effect command processing (S3215) is to execute processing corresponding to the display V winning effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the V winning performance command processing (S3215), first, a V winning performance display data table is determined based on the V winning performance command for display, and the determined V winning performance display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S4102).

Then, based on the V winning performance display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4101, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4104). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S4105), the V winning effect command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this way, when the V winning effect command for display is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the V winning effect command processing (S3215) is executed, and the V winning effect (Fig. (not shown) is displayed. This allows the player to easily recognize that he or she has won a V prize.

Returning to FIG. 62, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S3214, if it is determined that there is no display V winning effect command (S3214: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3216), and the error command is If there is one (S3216: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3217), and the process returns to S3201.

Here, details of the error command processing (S3219) will be described with reference to FIG. 68(b). FIG. 68(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S4201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4202). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S4201, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S4202, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S4202, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 62. In the process of S3216, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3216: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S3218), and the process returns to S3201.

In the process of S3201, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3201: Yes). ), the processes of S3202 to S3218 are executed again. Then, the processes of S3201 to S3218 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S3108) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Only the type commands are extracted and the processing corresponding to each command, such as the fluctuation pattern command processing (see Fig. 63(a)) and the stop type command processing (see Fig. 63(b)), is executed. For commands, processing is performed to discard them without executing the processing corresponding to the commands.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 63(a)) executed in this case, the display data table corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3301. In addition, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3302, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S3103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be explained with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 69, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S4301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S4301: No), It is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, so the process skips steps S4302 to S4304 and moves to the process S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S4302), S4303 to S4304 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S4303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S4304).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4401).

In task processing (S3104), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 69. After the warning image setting process (S4304) or in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4303: No), then the process moves to S4305.

In S4305, pointer update processing is executed (S4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f through the process of S4501, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4503), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S4503: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4505), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S4506), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4502: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In task processing, the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S4306, along with the warning image developed earlier, and display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4307), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). If the value of the time counter 233h is greater than or equal to 1 (S4308: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4308: Yes), it means that the presentation time of the presentation corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on or not. (S4309).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (S4309: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (S4310), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S4311). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4312), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S4314), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Incidentally, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S3104), until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S4315, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the confirmed display flag is on (S4309: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S4316). If the demo display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S4317), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S4318). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is in progress is set to ON (S4321), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, after the finalized display effect is finished, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the drawing content so that it is displayed.

In the process of S4316, if the demo display flag is on (S4316: Yes), it means that the demo effect will be performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process will end. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S3109) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 61(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image (either one of FIGS. 23(b) and 23(c)) is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S3105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. First, FIG. 72(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S4602), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S4601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off (S4601: No), all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 72(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S4701), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S4701: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S4702). In the process of S4702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S4702 that the transfer process has not finished (S4702: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4702: Yes), the process moves to S4703. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S4701, if the transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to S4703.

In the process of S4703, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4703), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S4703: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S4703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 61(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 62 to 68) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 69 to 71) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 73) (see S4601: No in FIG. 72(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed using . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the normal image transfer setting process (S4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the previously executed display setting process (S3103) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S4801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802), and if it is transfer data information (S4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4803), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805.

Further, in the process of S4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4802: No), the process of S4803 and S4804 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S4806).

In the process of S4806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S4806 that the transfer process has not finished (S4806: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4806: Yes), the process moves to S4807. Also, as a result of the process in S4805, if no image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S4805: No), the process proceeds to S4807.

In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807). If the transfer start flag is on (S4807: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S4803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4807: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S4809).

If the back image change flag 233w is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag 233w to off (S4810), the Among the back image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S4811). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process moves to S4813.

In the process of S4809, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S4809: No), there is no image data to start transfer, so the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

Note that if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S4815, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back side A, the normal image transfer process is immediately ended.

In the process of S4813, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The determination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S4813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: No), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S4813, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S4814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S4814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the displayed stop type information is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the opening performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S3106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3104) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S3105), a drawing list shown in FIG. 27 is generated (S4901). That is, in the process of S4901, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3104), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S3105), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are sent to the image controller (S4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is included as the drawing target buffer information, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1; includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. I can do it.

In the drawing process, after the process in S4902, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4903). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 61(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the V winning switch 65e3, the jackpot game is awarded after the small win D ends, but the probability of jackpot is not limited to this, and the probability of jackpot is the normal probability (1/399 ) The high probability state (probability variation: e.g. 1/39) set higher than It may be configured to set up to a period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that provides a probability change.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a fusion effect is displayed even when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, compared to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. It is configured so that In the fusion effect based on the jackpot, a so-called cut-in effect called an SP effect (see FIG. 75(b)) is displayed. Thereby, the player plays the game with the expectation that the SP effect will be displayed while the fusion effect is being displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the SP effect described above is also displayed in the fusion effect that is executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. If the SP effect is displayed even though the lottery result is a small win, at the end of the SP effect (i.e., at the end of the small win game), an effect (shaking) indicating the state to be transferred to will be displayed. direction) will be displayed. As a result, even if the SP effect is displayed but the jackpot is not achieved, the player is given the benefit of being able to easily determine the state to which the player will be transferred afterwards. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player's desire to play from decreasing.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display control device 81 has been partially changed; The structure of the winning variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the structure of the win fusion effect selection table provided in the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. and that some of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 75, an example of the fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described. FIGS. 75(a) to 75(c) are continuous diagrams partially showing examples of fusion effects.

In this embodiment, when winning the jackpot or small hit with the second special symbol, various win fusion effects (win fusion effects A, B, C) are displayed, and when winning the jackpot or small win with the first special symbol. 76 (b) and (c)).

In the winning combination performance A or the loss combination performance A that is displayed when winning a jackpot, a performance imitating a competition between a rabbit and a turtle is started, as in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 75). a)). Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed (in this embodiment, 2 seconds) after the competition between the rabbit and the turtle has started, the words "SP Chance!" are displayed in the center of the screen (so-called cut-in). effect) is displayed (see FIG. 75(b)). After that, a stop symbol (for example, "777", etc.) indicating a jackpot is displayed (not shown). Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that he has won the jackpot. Furthermore, since the player plays the game expecting the SP effect to be displayed while the fusion effect is being displayed, the player's interest can be improved.

In the fusion effects that are displayed when winning various small wins, there are various fusion effects with SP effects (win fusion effect B, loss fusion effect B, C, D, E) in which the above-mentioned SP effects are displayed, and SP effects. Various types of fusion presentations (winning fusion presentation C, losing fusion presentation F) without presentation are prepared (see FIG. 76(b)).

In various fusion performances with SP effects, the SP effect is displayed after a predetermined period of time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the fusion effect (Fig. 75 ( b)). After that, a stop symbol (for example, "341", etc.) indicating a small hit is displayed (see FIG. 75(c)). The stop symbol indicating this small hit swings up and down a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 2 to 8 times) and then becomes a complete stop display (stationary state). The number of times that the stopped symbols shake is determined corresponding to each type of fusion performance (winning fusion performance B, losing fusion performance B, C, D, E), and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 76(b). do. As a result, the player can predict the type of small winning won from the number of times the stopped symbols shake (in other words, it becomes possible to predict the gaming state to be set), so the number of times the stopped symbols shake This can attract attention and increase the interest of the players.

On the other hand, in the fusion performance without SP performance (winning fusion performance C, losing fusion performance F), a winning fusion performance or a losing fusion performance similar to the first embodiment described above is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, after the SP effect is displayed in the fusion effect, a stop symbol indicating a small hit may be stopped and displayed. In this case, an effect is performed in which the stopped symbols are swayed, and the player is given the benefit of being able to predict the game state to be set. This prevents players from losing their desire to participate in the game, even if the SP effect is displayed in the fusion effect, but the player subsequently wins a small hit (not a jackpot). Can be prevented (suppressed).

<Electrical configuration in second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 76(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. The rest of the configuration of the ROM 202 is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, so illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), in the winning variation pattern selection table 202f of this embodiment, the special pattern 1 jackpot variation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. For the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern C, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1. Therefore, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern C (variation time 4 seconds) is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Thereby, it is possible to secure the performance time for the fusion performance (losing fusion performance A) that is displayed when the player wins the jackpot described above.

On the other hand, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, special symbol 2 jackpot variation pattern E (variation time 4 seconds) is set. For the second jackpot variation pattern E, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1. Therefore, similarly to the first special symbol, when the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, the special symbol 2 jackpot variation pattern (variation time of 4 seconds) is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Thereby, it is possible to secure the performance time for the winning fusion performance (win fusion performance A) that is displayed when winning the above-mentioned jackpot.

FIG. 76(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning fusion performance selection table 222b1 provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 110 in the second embodiment, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a losing fusion performance selection table 222b2 provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 110 in the second embodiment. The rest of the configuration of the ROM 222 is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, so illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the winning fusion effect selection table 222b1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 76(b). In the winning fusion performance selection table 222b1, a winning fusion performance A is provided as a fusion performance type when the judgment result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. For the winning fusion performance A, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the performance counter 223g. Therefore, when the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the winning fusion performance A of the second special symbol is selected regardless of the value of the performance counter 223g.

On the other hand, when the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit D (miss), a winning fusion performance B and a winning fusion performance C are provided as the fusion performance types. For the winning fusion performance B, "0 to 99" is set as the judgment value of the performance counter 223g, and for the winning fusion performance C, "100 to 198" is set as the judgment value of the performance counter 223g. has been done. Therefore, if the judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit D (miss), winning fusion performance B with SP performance is selected with a probability of 100/199, and no SP performance with a probability of 99/199. The winning fusion performance C is selected.

Next, the contents of the losing fusion performance selection table 222b2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 76(c). In the losing fusion performance selection table 222b2, the losing fusion performance A is selected as the fusion performance type when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a jackpot. For the losing fusion performance A, "0 to 198" is set as the determination value of the performance counter 223g. Therefore, when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the losing fusion effect A is selected regardless of the value of the effect counter 223g.

On the other hand, loss fusion performances B, C, and F are provided as fusion performance types when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a small hit A (miss). For the losing fusion performance B, "0 to 19" is set as the judgment value of the performance counter 223g, and for the losing fusion performance C, "20 to 49" is set as the judgment value of the performance counter 223g. "50 to 198" is set as the determination value of the performance counter 223g for the losing fusion performance F. Therefore, if the judgment result of the first special symbol is small hit A (miss), loss fusion effect B with SP effect (2 swings) is selected with a probability of 20/199, and 30/199. The losing fusion performance C with SP performance (number of swings: 4) is selected with a probability of 149/199, and the losing fusion performance F without SP performance is selected with a probability of 149/199.

In addition, loss fusion effects C, D, and F are provided as fusion effect types when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a small hit B (miss). For the losing fusion performance C, "0-49" is set as the judgment value of the performance counter 223g, and for the losing fusion performance D, "50-99" is set as the judgment value of the performance counter 223g. "100 to 198" is set as the determination value of the performance counter 223g for the losing fusion performance F. Therefore, if the judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit B (miss), the loss fusion performance C with SP performance (4 swings) is selected with a probability of 50/199. Losing fusion performance D with SP performance (6 swings) is selected with a probability of , and losing fusion performance F without SP performance is selected with a probability of 99/199.

Furthermore, loss fusion effects D, E, and F are provided as fusion effect types when the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a small hit C (miss). For the losing fusion performance D, "0 to 74" is set as the judgment value of the performance counter 223g, and for the losing fusion performance E, "75 to 149" is set as the judgment value of the performance counter 223g. "150 to 198" is set as the determination value of the performance counter 223g for the losing fusion performance F. Therefore, when the judgment result of the first special symbol is a small hit C (miss), the loss fusion performance D with SP performance (6 swings) is selected with a probability of 75/199. Losing fusion performance E with SP performance (8 swings) is selected with a probability of , and losing fusion performance F without SP performance is selected with a probability of 49/199.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a symbol indicating a small hit is displayed in a stopped state after the SP effect is displayed, the stopped symbol is completely stopped and displayed in accordance with the type of small win ( The number of times it will shake before it comes to rest is set. As a result, the type of small win can be predicted (that is, the gaming state to be set can be predicted) based on the number of times the symbol indicating a small win shakes until it is completely stopped and displayed (still), so it is possible to predict the small win. It is possible to attract attention to the stopped display of the symbols shown, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. In addition, the selection ratio of each SP performance mentioned above may be arbitrarily determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of times the symbol indicating a small win is shaken until it is completely stopped is configured to be variable depending on the type of small win won, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. Specifically, it is of course possible to display a specific character image (for example, an image of a boy) depending on the winning type.

In this embodiment, the SP effect may be displayed in the fusion effect corresponding to all small win types (or jackpots), but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the SP effect may be displayed only in a fusion effect corresponding to a specific small win type (for example, a small win in which the gaming state is switched to a state advantageous to the player). Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that he/she has won a specific small winning type (that is, the gaming state has become advantageous for the player).

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 77 and 78. First, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 77, the special figure 1 variation start process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process 2 (S2202) in this second embodiment is executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similar to the special figure 1 variation start process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 54). It is processing. Note that the same parts as the special figure 1 variation start process (see FIG. 54) in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In the special figure 1 variation start process 2 in this second embodiment, the processes of S2301 to S2303 are executed similarly to the first embodiment. Then, the process proceeds to S2305 without executing the process in S2304. That is, regardless of whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the process moves to S2305. Thereby, even if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the fusion effect can be displayed.

The processes after S2305 (processes from S2305 to S2310) are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the present process ends.

Next, special figure 2 variation start processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 78. The special figure 2 variation start process 2 in the second embodiment is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similar to the special figure 2 variation start process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 55). . In addition, the same parts as the special figure 2 variation start process (see FIG. 55) in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In the special figure 2 variation start process 2 in this second embodiment, the processes of S2401 to S2403 are executed similarly to the first embodiment. Then, the process proceeds to S2405 without executing the process of S2404. That is, regardless of whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the process moves to S2405. Thereby, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the fusion effect can be displayed.

The processes after S2405 (processes from S2405 to S2410) are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the present process ends.

Note that the process of S2408 is different in that the losing fusion effect is selected using the losing fusion effect selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 76(c). Further, the process of S2410 is different in that a winning combination performance is selected using a winning combination performance selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. 76(b). Thereby, in the fusion performance, an SP performance can be displayed, and then a performance that shakes the small winning stop symbol can be displayed.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, the fusion effect is displayed even when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, and in the fusion effect, the SP effect (FIG. 75(b) It is configured so that a so-called cut-in effect called (see ) is displayed. Thereby, the player plays the game with the expectation that the SP effect will be displayed while the fusion effect is being displayed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the SP effect described above is also displayed in the fusion effect that is executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. If the SP effect is displayed even though the lottery result is a small win, at the end of the SP effect (i.e., at the end of the small win game), an effect (shaking) indicating the state to be transferred to will be displayed. direction) will be displayed. As a result, even if the SP effect is displayed but the jackpot is not achieved, the player is given the benefit of being able to easily determine the state to which the player will be transferred afterwards. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the SP effect may be displayed in the fusion effect corresponding to all small win types (or jackpots), but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the SP effect may be displayed only in a fusion effect corresponding to a specific small win type (for example, a small win in which the gaming state is switched to a state advantageous to the player). Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that he/she has won a specific small winning type (that is, the gaming state has become advantageous for the player).

In the present embodiment, the number of times the symbol indicating a small win is shaken until it is completely stopped is changed depending on the type of small win won, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, it is of course possible to display a specific image (for example, an image of a boy) depending on the winning type.

In this embodiment, a cut-in effect is displayed as the SP effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of displaying a cut-in effect, the back image may be changed, the display mode of the effect may be changed, or a specific image (for example, an image of a boy) may be changed. Of course, it may be displayed or a notification sound may be output.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the V winning switch 65e3, the jackpot game is awarded after the small win D ends, but the probability of jackpot is not limited to this, and the probability of jackpot is the normal probability (1/399 ) The high probability state (probability variation: e.g. 1/39) set higher than It may be configured to set up to a period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that provides a probability change.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 90. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of drawings of the first special symbol. Further, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, the variable pattern selection table set for selecting the variable pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed according to the number of drawings of each special symbol, that is, the elapse of the game time. Since the game state changes according to the game, the game can be varied and the player's interest can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the count of the number of drawings for the first special symbol is reset when a jackpot or a specific small win (small win E in this embodiment) occurs. Further, the count of the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is reset when a jackpot or a specific small win (small win G in this embodiment) occurs. Thereby, the timing at which the number of drawings for the first special symbol and the number of drawings for the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be made different. As a result, in addition to changing the gaming state as the gaming time elapses, it is also possible to change the gaming state depending on the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to add more variety to the game and improve the player's interest.

In the third embodiment, the back image is set (displayed) based on a variation pattern selection table set for selecting variation patterns of each special symbol. This back image determines whether the current gaming state is a gaming state in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is more likely to be stopped before the second special symbol (that is, a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player), or whether the first special symbol It becomes possible to predict whether the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to be stopped earlier (that is, a state advantageous to the player). This makes it possible to make the player interested in setting (displaying) the back image, thereby increasing the player's interest.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display control device 81 has been partially changed; The configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The configuration of the provided small hit type selection table 202d has been partially changed, some processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed, and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has changed. The only difference is that some of the processes that are executed have been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 79, the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a display mode of effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment.

In this embodiment, the back image is configured to be set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern set for the second special symbol. . This back image determines whether the current gaming state is a gaming state in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is more likely to be stopped before the second special symbol (that is, a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player), or whether the first special symbol It becomes possible to predict whether the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to be stopped earlier (that is, a state advantageous to the player).

For example, a short variation table with a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, and a long variation table with a long variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol. If there is, a back image of "town" indicating that the expectation level is 1 (lowest) is displayed (see FIG. 82(b)). On the other hand, a long variation table with a long variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, and a short variation table with a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol. In this case, a rear image of a "school of fish" indicating that the expectation level is 5 (highest) is displayed (see FIG. 82(b)). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 82(b).

FIG. 79(a) is a schematic diagram showing a fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a "mountain" back image is set as the back image. In this case, similarly to the first embodiment described above, a variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the display area Ds1 at the bottom left of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the display area Ds2 at the bottom right of the screen. A variable display of special symbols will be displayed. Then, in the center of the screen, a production (fusion production) imitating a race between a rabbit and a turtle is displayed, and a rear image of a "mountain" is displayed as the background image.

Similarly, FIG. 79(b) is a schematic diagram showing a fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the back image of "sandy beach" is set as the back image. c) is a schematic diagram showing a fusion effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the back image of "undersea" is set as the back image.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 82(b), but each back image is composed of a variable pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and a variable pattern selection table set for the second special symbol. It is set in combination with Specifically, when a variation table with a long variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, the selected back image becomes a highly anticipated back image. Further, when a variation table with a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, the selected back image becomes a highly anticipated back image. In other words, when there is a higher possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol will be stopped earlier than the variable display of the first special symbol, the back image with a high degree of expectation is selected. .

As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that a highly anticipated back image will be displayed, which can improve the player's interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the back image is configured to be set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern set for the second special symbol. However, it is not limited to this. Instead of changing the settings of the back image, for example, it may be configured to display a character design, the presentation mode may be changed, or a notification sound may be output. good.

<Electrical configuration in third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80(a), the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 80(a), the ROM 202 of this embodiment has the contents of the small winning type selection table 202d partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 13), and the variation table A setting information storage area 202j has been added. Details of the small winning type selection table 202d will be described later with reference to FIG. 80(c).

The variable table setting information storage area 202j is an area in which information defining the relationship between the number of lottery draws and the variable pattern selection table to be set is stored. Based on the information in this variable table setting information storage area 202j, a variable pattern selection table for each special symbol is set.

This fluctuation table setting information storage area 202j is referred to in the first special symbol fluctuation start process 3 (see FIG. 83) when determining whether it is time to change the settings of the fluctuation pattern table (see S352 in FIG. 83), It is referred to when setting the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol based on the value of the special symbol 1 lottery number counter 203n (see S353 in FIG. 83). Also, in the second special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 86), it is similarly referred to when determining whether it is the timing to change the setting of the variation pattern table (see S752 in FIG. 86), and the special symbol 2 lottery number It is referred to when setting the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol based on the value of the counter 203p (see S753 in FIG. 86).

Here, details of the variable table setting information storage area 202j will be described with reference to FIG. 81. The variable table setting information storage area 202j has a special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 and a special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2, as shown in FIG. 81(a). The special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 is a storage area in which a variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is defined based on the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n. The special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 is a storage area in which a variable pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is defined based on the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p.

First, with reference to FIG. 81(b), the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described.

The special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 stores a first short variation table (a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be selected) and a first short variation table (a variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be selected) as a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n. 1 medium fluctuation table (fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times are more likely to be selected than the 1st short fluctuation table) and 1st long fluctuation table (fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times are more likely to be selected than the 1st medium fluctuation table) ) are available. Details of the first short variation table, first medium variation table, and first long variation table will be described later with reference to FIG. 81(d).

In the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1, a first short fluctuation table is set for the value "0~7" of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n, and for the value "8~7" of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n. 18'', the first medium variation table is set, the first length variation table is set for the value ``19-48'' of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n, and the value ``19-48'' of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is set. A first medium variation table is set for "49 to 98", and a first long variation table is set for the value "99 to" of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81(c), the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described.

The special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 includes a second long variation table (a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected) and a second long variation table (variation patterns with a long variation time are likely to be selected) as a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p. 2 medium fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than the second long fluctuation table) and a 2nd short fluctuation table (a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than the second medium fluctuation table) ) are available. Details of the second long variation table, second medium variation table, and second short variation table will be described later with reference to FIG. 81(e).

In the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2, a second length variation table is set for the value "0~7" of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p, and for the value "8~7" of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p. 18'', the second medium variation table is set, the second short variation table is set for the value ``19-48'' of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p, and the value ``19-48'' of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p is set. A second medium variation table is set for "49-98", and a second short variation table is set for the value "99-" of the special drawing 2 lottery number counter 203p.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81(d), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. The special figure 1 variation pattern selection table 202f defines a first short variation table, a first medium variation table, and a first long variation table.

The first short variation table is a variation pattern table in which the special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) with a short variation time is easily selected. Specifically, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 149" of the variation type counter CS1, and special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "150 to 197" of the variation type counter CS1. Figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is set, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is set for the value "198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the first short variation table is set, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 150/199, and special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is selected. is selected with a probability of 48/199, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 1/199.

As for the first medium variation pattern, compared to the first short variation table, special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) with long variation time are likely to be selected. It is a pattern table. Specifically, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 99" of the variation type counter CS1, and special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "100 to 195" of the variation type counter CS1. Figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (fluctuation time 10 seconds) is set, and special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (fluctuation time 20 seconds) is set for the value "196 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the first medium variation table is set, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 100/199, and special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is selected. is selected with a probability of 96/199, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 3/199.

In the first long variation pattern, compared to the first medium variation table, special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) with long variation times are likely to be selected. It is a pattern table. Specifically, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 49" of the variation type counter CS1, and special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set for the value "50 to 189" of the variation type counter CS1. Figure 1 fluctuation pattern C (fluctuation time 10 seconds) is set, and special figure 1 fluctuation pattern E (fluctuation time 20 seconds) is set for the value "190 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, when the first length variation table is set, special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected with a probability of 50/199, and special figure 1 variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is selected. is selected with a probability of 140/199, and special figure 1 variation pattern E (variation time 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of 9/199.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81(e), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202f provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. The special figure 2 variation pattern selection table 202f defines a second long variation table, a first medium variation table, and a first short variation table.

The second length variation table is a variation pattern table in which the special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) with a long variation time is likely to be selected. Specifically, special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0" of the variation type counter CS1, and special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "1-49" of the variation type counter CS1. A variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and a special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the value "50 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the second length variation table is set, special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 1/199, and special figure 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is selected. is selected with a probability of 50/199, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 149/199.

In the second medium fluctuation table, compared to the second medium fluctuation table, special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) and special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) with short fluctuation times are easily selected. It is a pattern table. Specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 3" of the variation type counter CS1, and the special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "4 to 99" of the variation type counter CS1. Figure 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the value "100 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the second medium variation table is set, special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 4/199, and special figure 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is selected. is selected with a probability of 96/199, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 99/199.

In the second short fluctuation table, compared to the second short fluctuation table, special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) and special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern A (fluctuation time 4 seconds) with short fluctuation times are easily selected. It is a pattern table. Specifically, special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 9" of the variation type counter CS1, and special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "10 to 149" of the variation type counter CS1. Figure 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is set, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is set for the value "150 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the second short variation table is set, special figure 2 variation pattern A (variation time 4 seconds) is selected with a probability of 10/199, and special figure 2 variation pattern C (variation time 9 seconds) is selected. is selected with a probability of 140/199, and special figure 2 variation pattern E (variation time 19 seconds) is selected with a probability of 49/199.

Returning to FIG. 80, the explanation will be continued. FIG. 80(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80(b), in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19), the RAM 203 of this embodiment includes a special drawing 1 lottery number counter 203n and a special drawing 2 drawing number counter 203p. has been added.

The special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n is a counter for counting the number of lottery draws based on the first special symbol. This special symbol 1 lottery number counter 203n is incremented by 1 when a lottery based on the first special symbol is executed in the first special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 83) (see S351 in FIG. 83), and 1 In the special symbol variation stop processing 3 (see FIG. 84), when the stop processing that results in a jackpot is executed, it is initialized to 0 (see S651 in FIG. 84). Also, in the special figure 1 small hit stop processing 3 (see FIG. 85), when a stop process that results in a specific small win (small win E) is executed, it is also initialized to 0 (see S662 in FIG. 85). .

The special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of lottery draws based on the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 lottery number counter 203p is incremented by 1 when a lottery based on the second special symbol is executed in the second special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 86) (see S751 in FIG. 86), 1 In the special symbol variation stop processing 3 (see FIG. 87), when the stop processing that results in a jackpot is executed, it is initialized to 0 (see S951 in FIG. 87). Also, in the special figure 2 small hit stop processing 3 (see Figure 88), when the stop process that results in a specific small hit (small hit G) is executed, it is initialized to 0 (see S962 in Figure 88). .

Next, with reference to FIG. 80(c), the small hit type selection table 202d provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. This small hit type selection table 202d is based on the value of the small winning type selection counter, the small winning type, the presence or absence of passing V, and each lottery number counter (special drawing 1 drawing number counter 203n, special drawing 2 drawing number counter 203n, special drawing 2 This table is used to select whether or not to reset the lottery number counter 203p).

In the small hit type selection table 202d, special small hit types are set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For the first special symbol, two types of small winnings E and small winning F are set, and for the second special symbol, two types of small winning G and small winning H are set. For small win E, "0 to 3" is set as the judgment value of small win type selection counter C4, and for small win F, "4 to 198" is set as the judgment value of small win type selection counter C4. There is. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, "0 to 98" is set as the judgment value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit G, and the judgment value of the small hit type selection counter C4 for the small hit H. "99 to 198" is set as "99 to 198".

In this embodiment, when the small winning E is executed, the value of the special symbol 1 lottery number counter 203n is initialized to 0, and the variable pattern selection table for the first special symbol is switched. . Furthermore, when the small win G is executed, the value of the special symbol 2 lottery number counter 203p is initialized to 0, and the variable pattern selection table for the second special symbol is switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80(c), the small hit E of the first special symbol is set to "with reset", and the small win F of the first special symbol is set to "no reset". ing. Further, the small win G of the second special symbol is set to "with reset", and the small win H of the second special symbol is set to "no reset".

In addition, similar to the first embodiment, the small winnings (small winnings E, F) of the first special symbol are small winning types that are difficult (or impossible) to pass through V, and the small winnings of the second special symbol (Small win G, H) is a small win type in which passing through V is easy (or possible).

Here, in this embodiment, the variable pattern selection table is configured to be switched according to the number of drawings of the first special symbol (that is, the value of the special symbol 1 drawing number counter 203n), and the number of drawings of the second special symbol is changed. (That is, the value of the special figure 2 lottery number counter 203p), the variable pattern selection table is configured to be switched. As a result, the combination of the variable pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variable pattern selection table set for the second special symbol creates an advantageous state for the player (for example, the first special symbol It is possible to set a disadvantageous state (for example, when the fluctuation pattern selection table of the symbol is a table with a long fluctuation time) and a disadvantageous state (for example, when the fluctuation pattern selection table of the second special symbol is a table with a long fluctuation time).

In addition to this, in this embodiment, the timings at which the number of drawings for the first special symbol and the number of drawings for the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be made different. As a result, in addition to changing the gaming state as the gaming time elapses, it is also possible to change the gaming state depending on the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to add more variety to the game and improve the player's interest.

Next, the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82(a). As shown in FIG. 82(a), the ROM 222 of this embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(a)) in that a back image selection table 222c is added. do.

Here, the back image selection table 222c provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82(c). This back image selection table 222c specifies the back image to be set based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol. This is the table that was created.

Specifically, first, a case where the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first short variation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second long variation table, the back image of "town" whose expectation level is "1" (lowest) is selected. In the case of the second medium variation table, the back image of the "mountain" whose expectation level is "2" is selected. In the second short-term variation table, the back image of "sandy beach" whose expectation level is "3" is selected.

Next, a case where the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first medium variation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second long variation table, the back image of the "mountain" whose expectation level is "2" is selected. In the case of the second medium variation table, the back image of "sandy beach" with an expectation level of "3" is selected. In the case of the second short-term variation table, the back image of "sea floor" with an expectation level of "4" is selected.

Next, a case where the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol is the first short variation table will be described. In this case, if the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is the second length variation table, the back image of "sandy beach" with an expectation level of "3" is selected. In the case of the second medium variation table, the back image of "undersea" with an expectation level of "4" is selected. In the case of the second short-change table, the back image of the "school of fish" whose expectation level is "5" (highest) is selected.

In this way, when a variation table with a long variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol, a highly anticipated back image is likely to be selected. Further, when a variation table with a short variation time is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, a highly anticipated back image is likely to be selected. That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is more likely to be stopped earlier than the variable display of the first special symbol, the back image with a high expectation level is configured to be easily selected. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that a highly anticipated back image will be displayed, which can improve the player's interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82(c), the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 82(c), the RAM 223 of the present embodiment has an additional rear image information storage area 223m compared to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20(c)). differ.

The back image information storage area 223m is an area for storing the currently set type of back image. This back image information storage area 223m is referred to in order to determine the current back image (see S5004 in FIG. 90) in the back image changing process (see FIG. 90), and is based on the back image selected in the process. This is the area to be updated (see S5006 in FIG. 90).

<About the control processing of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 83 to 88. First, the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 83. In the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S203) in the third embodiment, a first special symbol is drawn, and a variation pattern is selected based on the lottery result. Then, it is a process of counting the number of drawings of the first special symbol and changing the setting of the variation pattern selection table of the first special symbol according to the counted number of drawings.

In the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S203) in this third embodiment, the processes of S301 to S304 are executed similarly to the first embodiment described above. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and the explanation thereof will be omitted. When the process of S304 is finished, the process of S351 to S353 is executed in place of the process of S305 and subsequent steps of the first embodiment.

Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n (S351), and then it is determined whether it is time to change the setting of the fluctuation pattern table (S352). In the process of S352, if it is determined that it is not the timing to change the settings of the variation pattern table (S352: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S352, if it is determined that it is time to change the settings of the fluctuation pattern table (S352: Yes), the value of the special drawing 1 lottery number counter 203n and the special drawing 1 table setting information storage area 202j1 are Based on this, a small winning variation pattern selection is set (S353), and then this process is ended.

Next, the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S204) in the third embodiment stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, similar to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204, see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. This is a process for initializing the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n to 0 when performing a process to cause the lottery to occur, and when performing a fluctuation stop that results in a jackpot or a specific small win (small win E).

In the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S204) in this third embodiment, the processes of S601 to S607, S608 and S609 are executed similarly to the first embodiment described above. The difference from the first embodiment is that the process of S651 is executed after finishing the process of S607, and that special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 is executed instead of the special figure 1 small hit stop process of S610. It is. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

In the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S204), after executing the process of S607, the value of the special symbol 1 lottery number counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S651), and this process is ended. Thereby, when a fluctuation stop resulting in a jackpot is executed in the first special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 lottery number counter 203n can be initialized to 0.

In addition, in the process of S602, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not on for special figure 1, that is, if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, special figure 1 small hit stop processing 3 ( S610) is executed, and this processing ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 85, but in this special figure 1 small hit stop processing 3 (S610), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a specific small hit (small win E), the special figure 1 The value of the lottery number counter 203n is initialized to zero. Thereby, when a fluctuation stop resulting in a specific small win (small win E) is executed in the first special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 lottery number counter 203n can be initialized to 0.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 85, the special figure 1 small winning stop process 3 (S610) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. The special pattern 1 small hit stop process 3 (S610) in this third embodiment is similar to the special pattern 1 small win stop process (S610, see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, when the small win is detected in the first special pattern. This is a process for initializing the value of the special figure 1 lottery number counter 203n to 0 when the fluctuation stop process is executed and the fluctuation stop process is executed to result in a specific small win (small win E).

In the special figure 1 small winning stop process 3 (S610) in this third embodiment, the processes of S621 to S625 are executed similarly to the first embodiment described above. The difference from the first embodiment is that the processes of S661 and S662 are executed after the process of S625 is finished. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

In the special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (S610) in this third embodiment, after executing the processes of S621 to S625, it is determined whether it is a specific small win (small win E) (S661). If it is determined in the process of S661 that it is not a specific small win (that is, it is a small win F) (S661: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S661 that it is a specific small win (that is, small win E) (S661: Yes), the value of the special drawing 1 lottery number counter 203n is initialized to 0 (S662). , and then ends this process. Thereby, when a fluctuation stop resulting in a specific small win (small win E) is executed, the value of the special drawing 1 lottery number counter 203n can be initialized to 0.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86, the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 86, S206), the special symbol 2 lottery frequency counter is used instead of the special symbol 1 lottery frequency counter 203n for the above-described first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 83, S203). 203p (S751) and the information in the special figure 2 table setting information storage area 202j2 instead of the special figure 1 table setting information storage area 202j1, a fluctuation pattern selection table is set (S752, S753 ), detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol variation stop process 3 (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 87. In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S207) in this third embodiment, in contrast to the above-described first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (see FIG. 84), the special symbol 1 lottery number counter 203n is replaced with a special symbol. 2. The only difference is that the value of the lottery number counter 203p is initialized to 0 (S951 or S920), so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88, the special figure 2 small hit stop process 3 (S920) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. Special figure 2 small hit stop processing 3 (S920) in this third embodiment is a specific small hit (small hit E) in contrast to the above-mentioned special figure 1 small hit stop process 3 (see FIG. 85). The difference is that instead of determining whether it is a specific small win (small win G) or not (S961), the value of the special drawing 2 drawing number counter 203p is set to 0 instead of the special drawing 1 drawing number counter 203n. Since the only difference is the initialization (S962), detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 89 and 90. First, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 89, the variable display setting process 3 (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The variable display setting process 3 (S2113) in the third embodiment differs from the variable display setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 57) in that a back image changing process (S2651) is executed. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are given the same reference numerals and the explanation thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In the variable display setting process 3 (S2113) in the third embodiment, the processes of S2601 to S2612 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process (S2113) in the first embodiment. When the process of S2610 or S2612 is finished, back image changing process is executed (S2651), and then this process ends.

Here, the back image changing process (S2651) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 90. The back image changing process (S2651) in this third embodiment is based on the variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol, This is a process for changing the back image.

In the back image changing process (S2651) in this third embodiment, first, the variation pattern selection table for the set first special symbol is determined (S5001), and then, the variation pattern selection table for the set second special symbol is determined. The variation pattern selection table is determined (S5002). Then, based on the determination results in S5001 and S5002, a back image is selected from the back image selection table 222c (S5003).

Next, the current back image is determined from the back image information storage area 223m (S5004). It is determined whether the back image selected in the process of S5003 is different from the current back image determined in the process of S5004 (S5005). In the process of S5005, if it is determined that the selected back image is the same as the current back image (S5005: No), there is no need to change the back image, and the process ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5005, if it is determined that the selected back image is different from the current back image (S5005: Yes), the back image information storage area 223m is updated based on the selected back image (S5006 ), a background image change command is set based on the selected back image (S5007), and this process ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of drawings of the first special symbol. Further, the variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is changed according to the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, the variable pattern selection table set for selecting the variable pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is changed according to the number of drawings of each special symbol, that is, the elapse of the game time. Since the game state changes according to the game, the game can be varied and the player's interest can be increased.

In the third embodiment, the count of the number of drawings for the first special symbol is reset when a jackpot or a specific small win (small win E in this embodiment) occurs. Further, the count of the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is reset when a jackpot or a specific small win (small win G in this embodiment) occurs. Thereby, the timing at which the number of drawings for the first special symbol and the number of drawings for the second special symbol are reset (initialized to 0) can be made different. As a result, in addition to changing the gaming state as the gaming time elapses, it is also possible to change the gaming state depending on the lottery result of each special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to add more variety to the game, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In the third embodiment, the back image is set (displayed) based on a variation pattern selection table set for selecting variation patterns of each special symbol. This back image determines whether the current gaming state is a gaming state in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is more likely to be stopped before the second special symbol (that is, a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player), or whether the first special symbol It becomes possible to predict whether the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to be stopped earlier (that is, a state advantageous to the player). This makes it possible to make the player interested in setting (displaying) the back image, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the back image is set (displayed) based on the variation pattern selection table set for selecting the variation pattern of each special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, instead of setting (displaying) the back image, you may change the presentation mode, display a specific character pattern, or output a notification sound. Of course it's good.

In the third embodiment, the number of drawings of the first special symbol is reset (initialized to 0) based on the specific small win type (small win E) in the first special symbol, but this is not limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, the number of drawings for the second special symbol may be reset based on a specific small win type (small win E) in the first special symbol, or both the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be reset. Of course, it is also possible to reset the number of lottery draws. Further, the number of times of drawing of the first special symbol may not be reset until the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot. In this case, when the number of times the first special symbol is drawn exceeds a predetermined number, a variable pattern selection table advantageous to the player may be set (a so-called ceiling is provided). This makes it possible to suppress (prevent) the player's desire to play from decreasing even if the state of not winning a jackpot continues for a long time. Note that the above-described configuration is not limited to the first special symbol, and may be similarly applied to the second special symbol.

The configuration of the third embodiment may be combined with the first embodiment described above. Specifically, in addition to changing the gaming state (setting of the variation pattern selection table for each special symbol) according to the number of drawings of the first special symbol (or second special symbol), the lottery result is It is configured so that the game state (setting of a variation pattern selection table for each special symbol) is changed even when a hit (or a big hit) is achieved. This increases the number of variations in which the game state changes, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the V winning switch 65e3, the jackpot game is awarded after the small win D ends, but the probability of jackpot is not limited to this, and the probability of jackpot is the normal probability (1/399 ) The high probability state (probability variation: e.g. 1/39) set higher than It may be configured to set up to a period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that provides a probability change.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 100. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, by providing a croon 900 (flowing period extension means) in which the number of game balls that can enter simultaneously is one ball above the second winning opening 64b, the second winning opening 64b is provided. It is configured such that a game ball does not (or is difficult to) enter the opening 64b at an interval shorter than a predetermined interval (20 seconds in this embodiment). Thereby, it is possible to prevent excessive game balls from entering the second winning hole 64b.

In the fourth embodiment, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 64b while the second special symbol is changing, the winning information is held. On the other hand, the winning information of the first special symbol is configured so that it cannot be withheld. As a result, when the winning information of the second special symbol is suspended, if the game ball does not enter the first winning hole 64a (that is, if the firing of the game ball is temporarily interrupted), the second A state where the variation of the special symbols is stopped (determined), that is, a state advantageous to the player can be created. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the winning information of the second special symbol will be withheld, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment, the winning information (start of fluctuation) of the second special symbol can be held, and the interval (20 seconds) at which the game ball enters the second winning hole 64b is based on the first special symbol. It is configured to be longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation (maximum 19 seconds). Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, two or more game balls will not enter the second winning hole 64b (that is, the winning information of the second special symbol will be withheld). (This is not an advantageous situation for the player.) Although the details will be described later, when a jackpot game is being executed, the winning information of the second special symbol is held, which is advantageous for the player. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that a croon 900 is provided above the second prize opening 64b of the game board, and the third symbol display control The presentation mode displayed on the device 81 has been partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the The difference is that some processing has been changed, and some processing that is executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 91, a pachinko machine 10 in a fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above in that a left frame button 22a is provided on the front left side of the front frame 14, and a right frame button 22a is provided on the front right side of the front frame 14. The difference is that 22b is provided, and the other parts are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The front frame 14 has a left frame button 22a provided on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and a right frame button 22b provided on the right side of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The left frame button 22a and the right frame button 22b (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22) are spaced apart from each other (approximately 500 mm), making it difficult to operate them with one hand. In this case, it is necessary to take your hand off the operating handle 51 and use both hands.

This frame button 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) is used, for example, to change the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or to change the content of the super reach performance. Operated by the player when making changes. Although details will be described later, an effect (see FIG. 94(b)) in which both frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) are operated simultaneously is also executed. By displaying (executing) an effect of simultaneously operating both frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) as shown in FIG. 94(b), the player's firing operation (operation of the operation handle 51) ) can be temporarily suspended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a pachinko machine 10 in a fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. The game board of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above in that a croon 900 is provided above the second prize opening 64b, and other points. The points are the same. Identical parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, a croon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b. The croon 900 is composed of a mortar-shaped (inverted dome-shaped) main body part and a cylindrical cylindrical part extending downward from the center of the mortar shape, and the main body part and the cylindrical part are integrally molded with resin.

The main body portion includes a bottom portion (spherical orbiting portion) whose bottom surface slopes downward toward the center, and a wall portion formed at the outer edge of the bottom portion. The cylindrical portion is provided with a through hole from the top to the bottom with a diameter that allows only one game ball to pass through, allowing the game ball that has reached the center of the bottom surface of the main body portion to flow down. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 93, but the game ball that enters (flows down) into the clone 900 goes around the bottom part (ball orbiting part) of the main body part, then passes through the through hole of the cylinder part and downwards. flowing down to

The croon 900 is inserted from the front side of the game board into a through hole (not shown) drilled in the game board by router processing, and is pivotally supported from the back side of the game board (not shown). The front and back position of the Croon 900 is such that the cylindrical portion of the Croon 900 comes into contact with the game board, and the back (back) side of the main body is on the back (back) side of the area where the game ball flows down, and the game It is in a position that protrudes from the back side of the board. Note that a lid member (not shown) is provided on the upper part of the main body part that protrudes toward the back side of the game board, and is configured to prevent game balls that have flown down to the main body part from flying out to the back side of the game board. ing.

Further, the vertical position of the croon 900 is provided above the second variable winning device 650 and below the position of the through gate 67. This allows game balls that have not entered the second variable winning device 650 and game balls that have not passed through the through gate 67 to enter the clone 900.

A nail is arranged above the croon 900 from the upper right to the upper center, and a game ball can enter only from the upper left of the croon 900. A variable member 901 is provided on the upper left side of the croon 900.

This variable member 901 is configured to move toward the front side when a load equivalent to one game ball is applied to the croon 900 (not shown). That is, when a game ball is orbiting the bottom of the main body of the Cloon 900, the variable member 901 is moved to the front side, making it impossible (or difficult) for a new game ball to enter the Cloon 900. ). Thereby, it is possible to suppress (prevent) two or more game balls from flowing down to the bottom surface of the main body of the croon 900 and circulating around.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a pachinko machine 10 in a fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is an enlarged perspective view of the clone 900 provided on the game board of the pachinko machine 10.

The game ball that has flown down to the croon 900 circulates around the bottom part (ball orbiting part) of the main body part for a predetermined period (19 seconds in this embodiment), and then passes through the through hole of the cylindrical part provided at the center of the bottom part. and flows downward. The game ball flowing down from the tube part of the croon 900 enters the second prize opening 64b provided below when the electric accessory 64b1 is opened. Since the time required for the game ball flowing downward from the Cloon 900 to enter the second prize opening 64b is 1 second, the game ball flowing down to the Cloon 900 enters the second prize opening 64b. The time required for this is 20 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 94(a) and 94(b), the presentation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIGS. 94(a) and 94(b) are examples of presentation modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 94(a) is a schematic diagram showing an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the first round). By displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94(a), it is possible to urge the player to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 64b during the jackpot game.

FIG. 94(b) shows the third symbol display device 81 when the second special symbol is reserved at the end of the jackpot game due to the game ball entering the second winning hole 64b during the execution of the jackpot game. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a mode of an ending effect displayed on the screen. By displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94(b), it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot game will end while the second special symbol is on hold. Furthermore, by displaying the effect shown in FIG. 94(b), the player is prompted to simultaneously press the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b provided on the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10. The firing operation (operation of the operating handle 51) can be temporarily interrupted.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is advantageous if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped earlier than the fluctuation of the first special symbol, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the winning of the first special symbol is not suspended, so if the second special symbol is suspended, unless the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, the fluctuation of the second special symbol will surely stop first. (i.e., an advantageous state for the player). Therefore, in this case, the effect shown in FIG. 94(b) is displayed. This can prompt the player to temporarily interrupt the firing operation (operation of the operation handle 51), and the variation of the second special symbol is stopped first without starting the variation of the first special symbol. It can be done as follows.

In addition, the configuration of this embodiment is not limited to this, and by arranging a right-side through gate above the first variable winning device 65 so that a game ball hit to the right passes through the right-side through gate, even jackpot games hit to the right can be played through. The normal electric accessory 64b1 may be configured to be easily opened by making it easy to pass through the gate, and the game ball may be configured to easily enter the second prize opening 64b. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable member 901 is configured so that only one ball rolls onto the croon means 900, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the variable member 901 is not provided may be adopted in which a game ball hit to the left is rolled into the croon means 900. Nails are arranged so that the ball does not enter the means 900, and only a right-hit game ball can enter the croon means 900. If the ball is hit to the right during a jackpot game or a small win game, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be stopped (cancelled) based on the detection of the game ball passing through the right side through gate, and all wins and losses will be canceled. It may be configured such that the determination result is determined as a failure, an error is notified to the third symbol display device 81, an alarm sound is output, or an error signal is output from an external output terminal. Furthermore, in the normal game state, when passing through the right side through gate, the fluctuation time may be lengthened or the probability of winning the normal symbol may be reduced. Furthermore, the time-saving game state is always used as a normal game state such as a jackpot game (the jackpot game state, but as a normal symbol state) In the normal game state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbols may be shortened or the probability of winning may be increased to make it easier to enter the second winning opening 64b.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various counters in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the fourth embodiment. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r is provided, and other parts are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r is composed of one execution area and one holding area (holding first area). In each of these areas, each value of a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of ball entry into the first ball entry port 64, respectively.

Specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the second winning opening 64b (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in one holding area (holding first area ) is stored in an empty area. Note that if data is stored in the first pending area, nothing new is stored.

In the main controller 110, when a special symbol is drawn, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reservation area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area ( Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

When data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Then, based on the new winning in the second winning opening 64b (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 can be acquired and stored in the reservation first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 96, the RAM 203 of this embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) in that a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r is added. The details of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203r are as described in FIG. 95, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 97 to 99. First, timer interrupt processing 4 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process 4 in the fourth embodiment differs from the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 28) in that a part of the special symbol variation process (S104) is changed, and the start The difference is that the winning process (S151) is executed, and the other parts are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

In the timer interrupt process 4 in this fourth embodiment, similarly to the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment, after executing the processes of S101 to S104, a start winning process is executed (S151). By executing this starting winning process (S151), the second special symbol can be suspended. When the process of S151 is finished, similar to the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment, after executing the process of S106 to S109, this process ends.

Next, the starting winning process (S151) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The start winning process (S151) in the fourth embodiment is one process in the timer interrupt process 4 (see FIG. 97) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment.

In the starting winning processing process (S151) in this fourth embodiment, first, it is determined whether the ball has won into the second winning opening 64b (S6001). In the process of S6001, if the ball has not entered the second winning hole 64b (S6001: No), the process ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S6001, if the ball has entered the second winning hole 64b (S6001: Yes), then the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is acquired (S6002), and the special It is determined whether the value (N2) of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is smaller than 1 (S6003). If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is larger than 1 (S6003: No), this process is ended as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is smaller than 1 (S6003: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s ( S6004), then set the special figure 2 reserved ball number command (S6005). Then, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r (S6006), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 99, the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. The second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206) in the fourth embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, similar to the second special symbol variation start process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). This is one process in the special symbol variation process (S104).

In the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206) in the fourth embodiment, S751 is replaced with the process in S701 to S702 with respect to the second special symbol variation start process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). The difference is that the processes from S755 to S755 are executed, and the other parts are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S206), first, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is obtained (S751), and then the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is obtained. is larger than 0 (S752). If it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S752: No), this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S752, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is larger than 0 (S752: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203s is determined. 1 is subtracted (S753), a reserved ball number command is set (S754), and data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203r is shifted (S755). Thereafter, the processes of S703 to S708 are executed, and the present process ends.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 100. First, command determination processing 4 (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 100. Command determination process 4 (S2112) in the fourth embodiment is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similar to the command determination process (S2112, see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment. Note that the same parts as in the command determination process (S2112, see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In command determination processing 4 (S2112) in the fourth embodiment, similarly to the command determination processing in the first embodiment, the processing in S2201 to S2207 is executed, and in the processing in S2207, it is determined that the held pitch count command has been received. If so (S2207: Yes), the process of S2208 is executed. After executing the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 (S2251). Specifically, when the command for the number of reserved balls is received during the execution of the variation of the second special symbol, it is determined that the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol becomes one. On the other hand, if the pending ball number command is received while the variation of the second special symbol is stopped, the variation of the second special symbol will be immediately started based on the winning information that is on hold. That is, since this is a case where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol does not become 1, it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0.

In the process of S2251, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 0 (S2251: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2251, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 (S2251: Yes), a V chance command for display is set (S2252), and this process ends.

The display V chance command set here is stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is stored in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. ) is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display V-chance command, the display control device 114 produces an effect (in other words, notifying that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has become 1 (that is, the situation has become advantageous for the player). (not shown) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2207, if the held pitch count command is not received (S2207: No), the processes of S2209 to S2213 are not executed, and the process moves to the process of S2253. In the process of S2253, it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S2253), and if the ending command has been received (S2253: Yes), then it is determined whether the special map 2 is on hold 1 (S2254). In the process of S2254, if the special drawing 2 is on hold 1 (S2254: Yes), a V chance ending command for display is set (S2255), and this process is ended.

The display V chance ending command set by the process of S2255 is stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is used as a command output of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221. During the process (S2102), the information is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 displays the effect shown in FIG. 94(b) on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display V chance ending command.

On the other hand, in the process of S2254, when it is determined that the special drawing 2 is not the reservation 1 (S2254: No), a normal ending command for display is set (S2256), and this process is ended.

In the process of S2253, if an ending command has not been received (S2253: No), the processes of S2214 to S2217 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the croon 900 (driving period extension means), in which the number of game balls that can enter at the same time is one ball, is provided above the second prize opening 64b. As a result, it is configured such that the game ball does not (or is difficult) to enter the second winning hole 64b at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval. Thereby, it is possible to prevent excessive game balls from entering the second winning hole 64b.

In the fourth embodiment, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 64b while the second special symbol is changing, the winning information is held. On the other hand, the winning information of the first special symbol is configured so that it cannot be withheld. As a result, when the winning information of the second special symbol is suspended, if the game ball does not enter the first winning hole 64a (that is, if the firing of the game ball is temporarily interrupted), the second A state where the variation of the special symbols is stopped (determined), that is, a state advantageous to the player can be created. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the winning information of the second special symbol will be withheld, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, by providing the clone 900 above the second winning hole 64b, it is configured so that the game ball does not enter the second winning hole 64b at an interval shorter than a predetermined interval (20 seconds). , but not limited to this. For example, a known distribution device may be used to distribute game balls so that they enter the second prize opening 64b at predetermined intervals (or at intervals longer than the predetermined intervals).

In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball to pass through the croon 900 is lengthened by the game ball orbiting the bottom surface (orbiting portion) of the croon 900, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. Instead of the clone 900, the number of game balls that can be entered at the same time is one ball, and a means (driving period extension means) that can extend the falling period of the game ball may be provided. Specifically, possible means include forming the downstream passage in a meandering shape to lengthen the downstream distance, and using a member (speed reduction member) that reduces the speed of the game ball in the downstream passage. As the speed reducing member, for example, a member exhibiting a high coefficient of friction (urethane rubber, etc.) that increases the frictional force generated when the ball rolls can be considered. It is also possible to increase the frictional force between the balls and the ball rolling surface of the downstream passage by making the ball rolling surface of the downstream passage rough or providing protrusions, thereby reducing the velocity of the ball flowing down.

In this embodiment, in order to prevent two or more game balls from simultaneously entering (flowing down) the croon 900, a movable member that is moved by the load on the croon 900 is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, a known non-electric accessory or an electric accessory may be provided at the entrance of the croon 900. Specifically, when a game ball enters the Cloon 900, if it is a non-electric accessory, the non-electric accessory at the entrance is mechanically moved, and if it is an electric accessory, it is moved electrically based on the detection of ball entry. The electric accessories at the entrance are movably controlled, making it impossible (or difficult) for game balls to enter the clown 900. Then, when the game ball flows down to the bottom of the Cloon 900, if it is a non-electric accessory, the non-electric accessory at the entrance is moved mechanically again, and if it is an electric accessory, it is moved electrically based on the falling detection. The electric accessory at the entrance is movably controlled again, and it becomes possible (or easy) for the game ball to enter the clown 900.

In this embodiment, the croon 900 is provided above the second winning opening 64b, but it may not be provided. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the V winning switch 65e3, the jackpot game is awarded after the small win D ends, but the probability of jackpot is not limited to this, and the probability of jackpot is the normal probability (1/399 ) The high probability state (probability variation: e.g. 1/39) set higher than It may be configured to set up to a period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that provides a probability change.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the game board, compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The jackpot game and the small winning game of special figure 1 are games in which the game ball enters the second variable winning device 650 (so-called left-handed game), and only the small winning game of special figure 2 is placed on the right side of the game board. The game is a game (so-called right-handed game) in which a game ball enters the first variable winning device 65 provided. As a result, the small winning game of special drawing 1 and the regular game can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operations for executing the game can be the same), and the small winning game of special drawing 1 can be made the same as the regular game (in other words, the operation for executing the game can be the same), and this can be done frequently The operational burden on the player for executing the small winning game of special figure 1 can be reduced.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, a jackpot type is provided in which a time-saving gaming state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is provided after the end of the jackpot game. I made it. As a result, the player executes the game with the expectation that the time-saving game state will be granted after the end of the jackpot game, so the player's interest can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is The configuration is partially changed, and some of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 101, a pachinko machine 10 in a fifth embodiment will be described. The game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is different from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, in that the second variable winning device 650 moves from the right side position to the left side position of the game board. The points that have been changed are that the first right winning opening 640a is provided above the first variable winning device 65, and the right through gate 670 is provided above the right first winning opening 640a. The other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened and closed (variable whether or not balls can be entered) in the jackpot game, and the first variable prize winning device 650 is opened and closed in the small winning game of special drawings 2. The device 65 is opened and closed (it is variable whether the ball can enter or not). On the other hand, in the small winning game of special drawing 1, instead of the first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed (it is variable whether the ball can enter or not).

Therefore, the jackpot game and the small win game of special figure 1 are games in which the game ball is fired to the left side of the game board (so-called left-handed hitting). As a result, the small winning game of special drawing 1 and the regular game can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operations for executing the game can be the same), and the small winning game of special drawing 1 can be made the same as the regular game (in other words, the operation for executing the game can be the same), and this can be done frequently The operational burden on the player for executing the small winning game of special figure 1 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the second variable prize winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the game board, and the first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the game board, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65 may be arranged in the center of the game board. As a result, the operations for executing the game can be the same for all games (regular game, jackpot game, small win game of special figure 1, small win game of special figure 2), so the player's The operational burden can be reduced. In addition, since each winning device is placed in the center of the game board, the player can select either right-handed or left-handed hitting, which increases the player's interest.

With this configuration, there is no need to hit right when the first special symbol hits a small hit, and by continuing the left-handed game, the small hit game with the first special symbol is executed, and then the normal game is executed. can be performed continuously while hitting left-handed. Therefore, in this embodiment, although the small winning of the first special symbol is frequently executed, the trouble of frequently switching to the right-handed game can be omitted, and the game can be easily continued. Further, in this embodiment, when the jackpot B is executed, the time-saving game is awarded eight times (the number of changes in the special symbol). In that case, the right through gate 670 and the right first winning hole 640a (the winning hole that triggers the activation of the first special symbol) are arranged so that the right side of the gaming area (the first variable winning hole) allows the game ball hit right to enter. Since the player is placed above the winning device 65, it is possible to play the time-saving game while playing right-handed. Furthermore, even in the normal gaming state, the game can be played either left-handed or right-handed, so the player can easily understand the game method and play the game easily.

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is configured so that the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, but the invention is not limited to this, and the first variable winning device 65 may be in the open state. In this case, by controlling the switching member 65h without activating it, it is possible to suppress the problem of consecutive jackpot games being executed. Furthermore, even when a time-saving game is awarded, it is possible to continue playing the right-handed game, and the game operation can be facilitated.

<Electrical configuration in fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be described. The ROM 202 of this embodiment is different in that the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d and the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed, and other points are the same. Identical parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 102(a). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are provided as jackpot A (15R jackpot, no electric support) and jackpot B (15R jackpot, 8 electric support).

Here, "Jackpot A (15R jackpot, no electric support)" means that after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds (one round is 30 seconds or until 10 balls hit), the normal state (states A to C) This is a big hit. In addition, "Jackpot B (15R jackpot, electric support 8 times)" means that after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, a time-saving state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes shorter) It's a big hit. The details will be described later, but in the time saving state, compared to the normal state (states A to C), it is easier to select a second special symbol whose fluctuation time is shorter than that of the first special symbol (i.e., the first special symbol). The fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to stop before the fluctuation of the first special symbol), which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot type selection table 202d, for jackpot A, the value of the first winning type counter CS2 is set to "0 to 99", and for jackpot B, the value of the first winning type counter CS2 is set to "100 to 198". is set. That is, the probability that jackpot A will be selected is set to 100/199, and the probability that jackpot B will be selected is set to 99/199.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102(b), details of the special figure 1 small winning fluctuation pattern selection table 2 (time saving state) 202f will be explained. This special figure 1 small hit variation pattern selection table 2 (time saving state) 202f is a small winning variation pattern selection table set for the first special symbol in the time saving state. In the special figure 1 small winning variation pattern table 2 (time saving state) 202f, a special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is defined.

Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is defined for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, the probability that the special pattern 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is selected as the small winning variation pattern of the first special symbol in the time saving state is set to 199/199 (namely, 100%).

Next, details of the special figure 2 small winning variation pattern selection table 4 (time saving state) 202f will be explained with reference to FIG. 102(c). This special figure 2 small hit variation pattern selection table 4 (time saving state) 202f is a small winning variation pattern selection table set for the second special symbol in the time saving state. Special figure 1 small winning variation pattern table 2 (time saving state) 202f defines special figure 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) and special figure 2 variation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds).

Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern F (fluctuation time 4 seconds) is defined for the value "0 to 65" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value "66 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified. On the other hand, special figure 2 variation pattern G (variation time 6 seconds) is defined. That is, in the time saving state, the probability that the second variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern for the small hit of the second special symbol is set to 66/199, and the probability that the second variation pattern G (variation time 4 seconds) is selected is set to 66/199. The probability that the variable time (6 seconds) is selected is set to 133/199.

Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be selected as the second special symbol is 66/199. As a result, the time saving state becomes a state in which fluctuation of the second special symbol tends to stop earlier than the first special symbol (ie, a state advantageous to the player) compared to the normal state (states A to C).

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, the RAM 203 of this embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 19) in that a time saving counter 203t is added, and other points are the same. be. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving counter 203t is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with a special symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is greater than 0, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with a special symbol. , and if the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols. This time saving medium counter 203t is set to 8 at the end of jackpot B (16R time saving jackpot) (see S1453 in FIG. 106). In this time-saving state, a small winning variation pattern selection table for the time-saving state is set (S1452), and the variation time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is shortened (see FIGS. 103(b) and 103(c)). ). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 104) or the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 105), each time the fluctuation of each special symbol is stopped, 1 is subtracted (S673 in FIG. 104). , see S973 in FIG. 105).

As mentioned above, the small hit fluctuation pattern set in the time saving state is such that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol compared to the normal state (states A to C). It is configured to be easily selected (that is, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to stop earlier than the fluctuation of the first special symbol). As a result, after the jackpot B ends, the second special symbol is likely to stop before the first special symbol, which is advantageous for the player (time saving state). Therefore, since it is possible to have the player play the game with one goal of winning the jackpot B, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

<About the control process of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 104 to 107. First, the first special symbol variation stop process 5 (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S204) in this fifth embodiment is that the processing from S671 to S676 is added to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. The other parts are the same. Identical parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 in this fifth embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends (S601: Yes) and the lottery result is similar to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing in the first embodiment. If it is a jackpot (S602: Yes), the process of S603 to S607 is executed, the time saving counter 203t is initialized to 0 (S671), and the process moves to S675 to end the time saving state.

On the other hand, when the variation time of the first special symbol ends (S601: Yes) and the lottery result is a small win (S602: No), the process of S610 is executed and the process moves to S672. Further, when the first special symbol is changing (S601: No) and the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203g is on (S608: Yes), the process of S609 is executed and the process moves to S672.

In the process of S672, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203t is greater than 0 (S672), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S672: No), this process is immediately terminated. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S672, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203t is larger than 0 (S672: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S673), and the value of the time-saving counter 203t becomes 0. It is determined whether or not (S674).

In the process of S674, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203t is not 0 (S674: No), this means that the time-saving state is to be continued, so the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S674, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S674: Yes), the process moves to the process of S675 in order to end the time saving state.

After completing the process of S671 or S674, the current status is acquired from the status setting area (S675), a fluctuation pattern selection table is set based on the status acquired in the process of S675 (S676), and this process is executed. finish. Through the process of S676, the variation pattern selection table set in the time saving state can be changed, and the time saving state can be ended.

Next, details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 105. This second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S207) is different from the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment in that the processing from S971 to S976 is added, and other are the same. In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S207), the same processing as the above-described first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 104) is executed for the second special symbol, so the detailed The explanation will be omitted.

Next, details of the jackpot control process 5 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 106. This jackpot control process 5 (S1304) is different from the jackpot control process (FIG. 45) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1451 to S1453 are added and executed at the ending timing, Other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In jackpot control processing 5 (S1304), the processing from S1401 to S1409 is executed similarly to the jackpot processing in the first embodiment (FIG. 45). In the process of S1409, if it is determined that it is the ending timing (S1409: Yes), an ending command is set (S1410) and the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411). Thereafter, it is determined whether the lottery result is jackpot B (S1451).

In the process of S1451, if it is determined that the lottery result is the jackpot A (S1451: No), there is no need to provide a time saving state after the jackpot ends, so the process ends as is. On the other hand, in the process of S1451, if it is determined that the lottery result is the jackpot B (S1451: Yes), the process moves to the process of S1452 in order to provide a time saving state after the jackpot ends.

In the process of S1452, the small winning variation pattern selection table for the time saving state (see FIGS. 102(b) and (c)) is set as the small winning variation pattern selection table for each special symbol (S1452), and the value of the time saving counter 203t is set. is set to 8, and this process ends. Thereby, the time saving state can be provided after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B.

Next, details of the small hit control process 5 (S1305) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. This small hit control process 5 (S1305) is different from the small hit control process (FIG. 47) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1651 to S1654 are added, and other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 5 (S1305), the processes from S1601 to S1605 are executed similarly to the first embodiment. In the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1605: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit of the first special symbol (S1651).

In the process of S1651, if it is determined that it is a small win of the first special symbol (S1651: Yes), in order to open the second variable winning device 650, the opening of the second variable winning device 650 is set ( S1652), this process ends. In the process of S1651, if it is determined that it is a small win of the second special symbol (S1651: No), in order to release the first variable winning device 65, a small win operation process is executed (S1616), This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, if it is determined that it is not the start time of a new round (S1605: No), the process moves to the process of S1607. In the process of S1607, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the round (S1607), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit of the first special symbol (S1653).

In the process of S1653, if it is determined that it is a small win of the first special symbol (S1653: Yes), in order to close the second variable winning device 650, the closing of the second variable winning device 650 is set ( S1654), this process ends. In the process of S1653, if it is determined that it is a small win of the second special symbol (S1653: No), in order to close the first variable winning device 65, the closing of the first variable winning device 65 is set ( S1608), this process ends.

With this small hit control process 5 (S1305), when the first special symbol wins a small hit, the second variable prize winning device 650 provided on the left side of the game board is opened and closed (variable) to allow a so-called left-handed game. can. Furthermore, when the second special symbol wins a small prize, the first variable prize winning device 65 provided on the right side of the game board is opened and closed (variable) to allow a so-called right-handed game.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the game board, compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The jackpot game and the small winning game of special figure 1 are games in which the game ball enters the second variable winning device 650 (so-called left-handed game), and only the small winning game of special figure 2 is placed on the right side of the game board. The game is a game (so-called right-handed game) in which a game ball enters the first variable winning device 65 provided. As a result, the small winning game of special drawing 1 and the regular game can be made the same (so-called left-handed game) (that is, the operations for executing the game can be the same), and the small winning game of special drawing 1 can be made the same as the regular game (in other words, the operation for executing the game can be the same), and this can be done frequently The operational burden on the player for executing the small winning game of special figure 1 can be reduced.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, a jackpot type is provided in which a time-saving gaming state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is provided after the end of the jackpot game. I made it. As a result, the player executes the game with the expectation that the time-saving game state will be granted after the end of the jackpot game, so the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the V winning switch 65e3, the jackpot game is awarded after the small win D ends, but the probability of jackpot is not limited to this, and the probability of jackpot is the normal probability (1/399 ) The high probability state (probability variation: e.g. 1/39) set higher than It may be configured to set up to a period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that provides a probability change.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115. The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that when a change that results in a jackpot starts in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other The system is configured to forcibly remove the special symbol from the lottery and execute the fluctuation (that is, the system is configured so that the fluctuation that results in a jackpot is not forcibly stopped). As a result, for example, when a jackpot variation based on the second special symbol is being executed, the small win variation based on the first special symbol stops first, so that the jackpot variation based on the second special symbol is It is possible to prevent (suppress) unauthorized changes. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which a jackpot does not occur even though a performance suggesting a jackpot is executed (displayed), and it is possible to prevent (suppress) a player's desire to participate from decreasing. .

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that a plurality of jackpot types (jackpot A1, A2, A3) are provided when the player passes the V winning switch 65e3. I have to. The state to which the game is transferred after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the jackpot type. As a result, the game state can be changed (changed) not only when the lottery result is a small win, but also when the lottery result is a jackpot, so the game can be varied, and the game It can improve people's interest.

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment to be configured to perform (display) an SP reach effect when the lottery result is a jackpot. Thereby, the player can be given a sense of the arrival of a jackpot, and the player's interest can be increased.

Compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment also has SP reach effect (special figure 1 small win) even in the case of a small win that moves to state B or state C. , or for special drawing 2 small winnings) is executed (displayed). This increases the frequency with which the SP reach effect is displayed, which can improve the player's interest, and even if the SP reach effect is displayed but does not result in a jackpot, it will be advantageous for the player. Since the state shifts to state B or state C, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's desire to play from decreasing.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 has been partially changed; Some of the processes executed by the MPU 201 of the device 110 are changed, and some processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 108, the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIGS. 108(a) to (c) are examples of presentation modes of the SP ready-to-reach presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, the SP reach effect (special symbol 2 jackpot) is executed (displayed), and when the first special symbol becomes a small win and predetermined conditions are met. If the SP reach effect (special pattern 1 small hit) is executed (displayed) and the second special symbol becomes a small win, and if the predetermined conditions are met, the SP reach effect (special pattern 2 small win) will be executed (displayed). ) to be done.

In various SP reach effects, a variable display is executed in a normal effect mode (see FIG. 108(a)). Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (in this embodiment, 2 seconds) after the start of the variable display, the words "Super Reach!!" are displayed at the top of the screen (see FIG. 108(b)). After that, if the SP reach effect indicates a special figure 2 jackpot, a stop symbol (for example, "777", etc.) indicating a jackpot is displayed (not shown). Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that he has won the jackpot. Furthermore, since the player plays the game expecting the SP reach effect to be displayed, the player's interest can be increased.

On the other hand, if the SP reach effect indicates a special drawing 1 small hit or special drawing 2 small winning, the words "Super Reach!!" are displayed at the top of the screen, and then a stop symbol indicating a small win (for example, "341", etc.) is displayed (see FIG. 108(c)). The stop symbol indicating this small hit swings up and down a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 2 to 8 times) and then becomes a complete stop display (stationary state). The number of times the stopped symbols shake is predetermined according to the type of small winning won.

The relationship between the small hit type and the number of swings of the stopped symbols is the same as in the second embodiment. Specifically, in the case of small win A, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 19", the number of swings will be "2", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "20 to 49", the number of swings will be "2". If the value of the effect counter 223g is "50 to 198", the number of shakes is "0".

In the case of small win B, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 49", the number of swings will be "4 times", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "50 to 99", the number of swings will be "6 times". , if the value of the effect counter 223g is "100 to 198", the number of shaking is "0".

In the case of small hit C, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 74", the number of swings will be "6 times", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "75 to 149", the number of swings will be "8 times". Therefore, if the value of the performance counter 223g is "150 to 198", the number of shaking is "0".

In the case of a small hit D, if the value of the production counter 223g is "0 to 99", the number of swings will be "8 times", and if the value of the production counter 223g is "100 to 198", the number of swings will be "0 times". becomes.

As a result, the player can predict the type of small winning won from the number of times the stopped symbols shake (in other words, it becomes possible to predict the gaming state to be set), so the number of times the stopped symbols shake This can attract attention and increase the interest of the players.

In this manner, in this embodiment, after the SP ready-to-win effect is displayed, a stop symbol indicating a small hit may be stopped and displayed. In this case, an effect is performed in which the stopped symbols are swayed, and the player is given the benefit of being able to predict the game state to be set. This prevents players from losing their desire to participate in the game, even if the SP reach effect is displayed but subsequently results in a small win (not a jackpot). Suppression) possible.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109(a) to 109(c). As shown in FIG. 109(a), the ROM 202 of this embodiment has a partially changed content of the variation pattern selection table 202f compared to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 13). , V passing jackpot type selection table 202k is added, and other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 109(b), the contents of the winning variation pattern selection table 202f, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table 202f, will be explained. The winning variation pattern selection table 202f is a table that defines variation patterns to be selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 when a jackpot occurs in each special symbol.

In the first special symbol, a special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern E (variation time 10 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the first special symbol hits the jackpot, the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern E is selected with a probability of 199/199 (1/1).

In the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 jackpot variation pattern F (variation time 9 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. That is, when the second special symbol hits the jackpot, the special symbol 2 jackpot variation pattern F is selected with a probability of 199/199 (1/1).

Next, with reference to FIG. 109(c), the contents of the V passing jackpot type selection table 202k will be explained. The jackpot type selection table 202k when passing V is a table that defines the jackpot type to be selected based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 when the game ball passes the V winning switch 65e3. This V passing jackpot type selection table 202k is set when the V winning flag 203e is on in the small winning ending process 6 (see FIG. 113) (that is, when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the small winning game). , is referenced to select the jackpot type.

In the jackpot type selection table 202k when passing V, jackpot A1 (15R jackpot) is set for the value "0 to 89" of the first winning type counter C2, and the jackpot A1 (15R jackpot) is set to the value "90 to 179" of the first winning type counter C2. For this, jackpot A2 (15R jackpot) is set, and jackpot A3 (15R jackpot) is set for the value "180-198" of the first winning type counter C2. That is, as for the jackpot types selected based on the game ball passing through the V winning switch 65e3, the probability that jackpot A1 will be selected is set to 90/199, and the probability that jackpot A2 will be selected is set to 90/199. The probability of jackpot A3 being selected is set to 19/199.

Here, "jackpot A1 (15R jackpot)" is a jackpot that shifts to state A after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds (one round is 30 seconds or 10 balls hit). “Jackpot A2 (15R jackpot)” is a jackpot that shifts to state B after the same maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds. “Jackpot A3 (15R jackpot)” is a jackpot that shifts to state C after the same maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds. In this way, it is possible to change the state to which the game moves afterward, depending on the type of jackpot awarded based on passing the V winning switch 65e3.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 110 to 113. First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 110, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) in the sixth embodiment is that the processes from S451 to S453 are added to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The other parts are the same. Identical parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S303) in the sixth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a variation based on the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed (S451). In the process of S451, if it is determined that the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the second special symbol is not being executed (S451: No), the process of S401 to S409 is executed similarly to the first embodiment, and this process is ended. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S451, if it is determined that the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed (S451: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is not drawn and the lottery result is forcibly removed. In order to set this, the process moves to step S452.

In the process of S452, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a loser (S452), the loser symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S453), and this process is ended. . As a result, if the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot has started, the lottery result of the first special symbol will not be drawn and the lottery result will be forcibly set as a loss. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol from becoming a jackpot at the same time, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand for players.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 111, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. The second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) in the sixth embodiment is that the processes from S851 to S853 are added to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The other parts are the same. Identical parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 6 (S703) in this sixth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a variation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed (S851). In the process of S851, if it is determined that the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is not being executed (S851: No), the processes of S801 to S809 are executed in the same way as in the first embodiment, and this process ends. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S851, if it is determined that the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the first special symbol is being executed (S851: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is not drawn and the lottery result is forcibly removed. In order to set this, the process moves to step S852.

In the process of S852, the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a loser (S852), the loser symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S853), and this process is ended. . As a result, if the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot has started, the lottery result of the second special symbol will not be drawn, and the lottery result will be forcibly set as a loss. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol from becoming a jackpot at the same time, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand for players.

Next, jackpot control processing 6 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 112. The jackpot control process 6 (S1304) in this sixth embodiment is different from the jackpot control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 45) in that the processes from S1471 to S1472 are added, and the other parts are are the same. Identical parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

In the jackpot control process 6 (S1304) in the sixth embodiment, processes from S1401 to S1409 are executed similarly to the first embodiment. Then, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that it is the ending start timing in the jackpot game (S1409: Yes), the process moves to S1410. In the process of S1410, an ending command is set (S1410), the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411), and the process moves to S1471.

In the process of S1471, a state corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the state setting area 223h (S1471). Specifically, if the jackpot type is jackpot A1, state A is set, if jackpot A2 is jackpot A2, state B is set, and if jackpot A3 is jackpot A3, state C is set (Figure 109 (see (c)). Next, the state counter 203k is set based on the state set in the process of S1471 (S1472), a state command corresponding to the set state is set (S1473), and this process ends.

The status command set by the process of S1703 is stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 201. is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 updates the value of the slave status area 223h by receiving this status command (see S2210 in FIG. 53).

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 113, the small winning ending process 6 (S1610) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. The small winning ending process 6 (S1610) in the sixth embodiment is different from the small winning ending process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 49) in that the processes from S1851 to S1853 are added, and other The parts are the same. Identical parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

In the small winning ending process 6 (S1610) in the sixth embodiment, the processes from S1801 to S1802 are executed similarly to the first embodiment. Then, in the process of S1802, if it is determined that the V winning flag 203e is on (S1802: Yes), then the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired (S1851).

Based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1851, the jackpot type is acquired from the V passing jackpot type selection table 202k (S1852). A jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type acquired in the process of S1852 is set (S1853), and the process moves to S1804. After executing the processes from S1804 to S1807, this process ends. Note that the processes from S1804 to S1807 are the same as in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 114 and 115. First, with reference to FIG. 114, the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (S2204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. Special figure 2 variation start processing 6 (S2204) in this sixth embodiment is the process of S2451 and S2452 in place of the process of S2404 with respect to the special figure 2 variation start process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 55). The difference is that the execution has been changed, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (S2204) in the sixth embodiment, the processes from S2401 to S2403 are executed similarly to the first embodiment. After that, SP reach selection processing is executed (S2451), and the process moves to S2452. Details of the SP reach selection process (S2451) will be described later with reference to FIG. 115.

If SP reach is selected in the process of S2452 (S2452: No), the SP reach effect is executed (displayed) and the fusion effect is not executed (displayed), so the processes of S2405 to S2414 are skipped. , this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2451, if SP reach is not selected (S2452: Yes), in order to execute (display) the fusion effect, processes from S2405 to S2414 are executed and the present process ends. Note that the processes from S2405 to S2414 are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 115, details of the SP ready-to-reach selection process (S2451) executed in the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (S2204) in the sixth embodiment will be described. This SP ready-to-reach selection process (S2451) is a process for selecting the SP ready-to-reach effect.

In the SP reach selection process (S2451), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5101). In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot (S5101: No), the process moves to S5102 in order to execute (display) the SP reach effect based on the jackpot.

In the process of S5102, SP reach effect (special figure 2 jackpot) is selected (S5102), and this process ends. Here, in this embodiment, the variation pattern selected when the second special symbol becomes a jackpot is the special symbol 2 jackpot variation pattern F (variation time 9 seconds). Therefore, the performance time of the SP reach performance (special map 2 jackpot) was also set to 9 seconds. As a result, it is possible to match the performance time of the SP reach performance (special figure 2 jackpot) with the variable time for the second special symbol to become a jackpot, and it is possible to provide a performance that does not feel strange to the player. .

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win (S5101: Yes), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small win B or a small win C. It is determined (S5103).

If it is determined in the process of S5103 that the lottery result is a small win A (S5103: No), the SP reach effect is executed (displayed) because the state is shifted to state A after the small win game ends. In order to prevent this from happening, this process is ended immediately.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the lottery result is a small win B or a small win C (S5103: Yes), the state will be shifted to state B or state C after the end of the small win game. , in order to execute (display) the SP reach effect, the process moves to S5104.

In the process of S5104, it is determined whether the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol (S5104). In the process of S5104, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (S5104: Yes), the fluctuation of the first special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation of the second special symbol. This is the case when the system is also stopped first. In this case, it is then determined whether the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is between 8.7 seconds and 9.7 seconds (S5105).

In the process of S5105, if it is determined that the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol is between 8.7 seconds and 9.7 seconds (S5105: Yes), the residual fluctuation time of the first special symbol is SP Since this is within the range in which the ready-to-win effect (special figure 1 small win) can be executed (displayed), the SP ready-to-reach effect (special figure 1 small win) is selected (S5106), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, if it is determined that the residual variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than 8.7 seconds or longer than 9.7 seconds (S5105: No), the residual variation time of the first special symbol is Since the remaining variation time is not within the range in which the SP ready-to-win effect (1 small winning special figure) can be executed (displayed), the process is immediately terminated. If the SP reach effect (special figure 1 small win) is not selected, then in the special figure 2 variation start process 6 (see FIG. 114), the fusion effect will be selected.

In the process of S5104, if it is determined that the remaining variation time of the first special symbol is longer than the variation time of the second special symbol (S5104: No), the variation of the second special symbol is longer than the variation of the first special symbol. This is the case when the system is also stopped first. In this case, it is then determined whether or not the variation time of the second special symbol is 9 seconds (S5107).

In the process of S5107, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 9 seconds (S5107: Yes), the SP ready-to-win effect (special symbol 2 small win) is selected and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5107, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is not 9 seconds (S5107: No), this process is directly ended. Thereby, it is possible to execute (display) the SP ready-to-reach effect (special pattern 2 small win) according to the variation time of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to match the performance time of the SP reach performance (special symbol 2 small win) and the fluctuation time for the second special symbol to become a small win, and to provide a performance that does not feel strange to the player. I can do it.

In this way, when the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, by executing (displaying) the SP reach effect (special symbol 2 jackpot), it is possible to make the player feel that the jackpot is coming, and the player can improve the interest of

In addition, in the case of a small hit that moves to state B or state C, SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) or SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit), which is the same production mode as SP reach effect (special figure 2 jackpot), or SP reach effect (special figure 1 small hit) 2) is executed (displayed). This increases the frequency with which the SP reach effect is displayed, which can improve the player's interest, and even if the SP reach effect is displayed but does not result in a jackpot, it will be advantageous for the player. Since the state shifts to state B or state C, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's desire to play from decreasing.

As explained above, in the sixth embodiment, when a change that results in a jackpot starts in either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the drawing of the other special symbol is forced. It was configured to perform fluctuations with the exception. As a result, for example, when a jackpot variation based on the second special symbol is being executed, the small win variation based on the first special symbol stops first, so that the jackpot variation based on the second special symbol is It is possible to prevent (suppress) unauthorized changes. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which a jackpot does not occur even though a performance suggesting a jackpot is executed (displayed), and it is possible to prevent (suppress) a player's desire to participate from decreasing. .

In the sixth embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots (jackpots A1, A2, and A3) are provided when the player passes the V winning switch 65e3. The state to which the game is transferred after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the jackpot type. As a result, the game state can be changed (changed) not only when the lottery result is a small win, but also when the lottery result is a jackpot, so the game can be varied, and the game It can improve people's interest.

The sixth embodiment may be combined with the fourth embodiment described above. Specifically, in the fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that fluctuations in jackpots are not forcibly stopped. As a result, in the fourth embodiment, the game ball enters the first winning hole 64a even though the second special symbol is on hold, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol that results in a jackpot is forced. There is no need to display an effect (see FIG. 94(b)) to prevent the process from being stopped. This eliminates the need to display an effect (see FIG. 94(b)) urging the player to press the left frame button 22a and the right frame button 22b, and the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the V winning switch 65e3, the jackpot game is awarded after the small win D ends, but the probability of jackpot is not limited to this, and the probability of jackpot is the normal probability (1/399 ) The high probability state (probability variation: e.g. 1/39) set higher than It may be configured to set up to a period. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 may be a switch that provides a probability change.

<Modification of third embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. The pachinko machine 10 in this modification of the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment described above in that when the lottery based on the first special symbol is continuously executed, each special symbol The rear image was configured to be selected regardless of the variation pattern selection table set for the camera. When the lottery based on the first special symbol is executed continuously, the first lottery is held until a variable pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, until a highly anticipated back image is displayed). There is a high possibility that an illegal game is being carried out in which game balls are gradually introduced into the winning hole 64a. Therefore, in this modification, when such an illegal game is being executed, a background image with a low expectation level (a background image of "town") is forcibly set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the above-mentioned illegal game from being carried out.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed; The difference is that some processes executed by the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113 have been changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the third section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in modification of third embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 116(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 116(a), the ROM 222 of this modified example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 80) in that the contents of the back image selection table 222c are partially changed. The other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that details of this back image selection table 222c will be described later with reference to FIG. 117.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116(b). As shown in FIG. 116(b), the RAM 223 of this modification has a special drawing 1 consecutive lottery counter 223r and a table selection performance counter 223s added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 80). They are different in that they are the same, and are the same in other respects. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of times that the variation of the first special symbol is executed continuously. This special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is set when the special figure 1 variation start flag 223c is on in the variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 118) (that is, when the variation of the first special symbol is started) is initialized to 0 when the special symbol 2 fluctuation start flag is on (that is, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started). The value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is referred to in the back image change process 7 (see FIG. 119), and when it is determined that the value is 10 or more, it is set for each special symbol. Regardless of the variation pattern selection table, the back image of "town" will be selected.

When the value of the special drawing 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is large (in this modification, it is 10 or more), the back image with high expectations is displayed until a variable pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set. There is a high possibility that an illegal game is being carried out in which game balls are gradually introduced into the first winning hole 64a until the game is played. Therefore, in this modification, when such an illegal game is being executed, a background image with a low expectation level (a background image of "town") is forcibly set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the above-described illegal game from being carried out.

The table selection performance counter 223s is a counter for determining which of a high reliability back image selection table 222c1 and a low reliability back image selection table 222c2 to be described later is used to select a back image. This table selection performance counter 223s is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 3". Although not shown, like the effect counter 223g, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the back image set in this modification will be described. First, a method for calculating a determination value for selecting a back image will be described with reference to the determination value calculation pattern table shown in FIG. 117(a). In this modification, determination values are set in various tables (first short variation table, second long variation table, etc.) set for each special symbol. There are three types of determination values set for each table: "0", "1", and "2", and the more advantageous the table is to the player, the larger the determination value is set. This determination value is used to determine the combination of variation pattern selection tables set for each special symbol.

Specifically, among the variation pattern selection tables set for the first special symbol, "0" is set as the judgment value for the first short variation table, and "1" is set as the judgment value for the first medium variation table. "2" is set as the determination value of the first length variation table. That is, it is set such that the easier it is for a variation pattern with a longer variation time to be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the larger the value of the determination value becomes.

On the other hand, among the variation pattern selection tables set for the second special symbol, "0" is set as the judgment value of the second long variation table, "1" is set as the judgment value of the second medium variation pattern, “2” is set as the determination value of the second short fluctuation pattern. That is, it is set so that the easier it is to select a variation pattern with a shorter variation time as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the larger the value of the determination value becomes.

Here, in this modification, it is more advantageous for the player if the variation of the second special symbol is stopped earlier than the variation of the first special symbol. Therefore, if the variation time of the first special symbol is long, it is advantageous for the player. That is, when a variation pattern selection table with a large determination value as described above is set as a variation pattern for the first special symbol, the situation is advantageous for the player. Furthermore, it is also advantageous for the player if the variation time of the second special symbol is short. That is, even when a variation pattern selection table with a large determination value as described above is set as a variation pattern for the second special symbol, the situation is advantageous for the player.

As a result, as a combination of variable pattern selection tables set for each special symbol, if a variable pattern selection table with a large judgment value is set for each special symbol, it is very advantageous for the player. state. That is, the larger the total value of the determination values of the variable pattern selection tables for each special symbol set, the more advantageous the player will be.

Therefore, in this modification, a back image suggesting a degree of advantage for the player is selected based on the total value of the above-mentioned judgment values and the value of the performance counter 223g. The details will be described later, but the larger the total value of the judgment values, the more likely it is that the back image with high expectation will be selected. Conversely, the smaller the total value of the judgment values, the more the expectation The configuration is such that a rear image with a low value is easily selected. This makes it possible to simplify the process of selecting a back image that suggests a degree of advantage for the player, and to reduce the processing load.

Next, the contents of the back image selection table 222c in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 117(b). The back image selection table 222c is a table that is referred to when selecting a back image in the back image change process 7 (S2651). The back image selection table 222c includes a high reliability back image selection table 222c1 and a low reliability back image selection table 222c2. In the back image selection table for each reliability level, the same back images as in the fourth embodiment (in descending order of expectation level, "city", "mountain", "sandy beach", "bottom of the sea", and "school of fish") are defined. ing.

Details will be described later, but in the high reliability back image selection table 222c1, if the sum of the discriminant values is small (“0”), the back image with high expectation (back image of “bottom sea”) is selected. is specified so that it is not selected. On the other hand, when the total value of the discriminant values is large ("4"), it is specified that a back image with a low expectation level (a back image of "city") is not selected. On the other hand, in the low reliability back image selection table 222c2, even if the sum of the discriminant values is small (“0”), the back image with a high expectation level (the back image of “bottom floor”) is selected. It is specified that there is a possibility that it may be selected. In addition, even if the sum of the discriminant values is large (“4”), it is stipulated that a back image with a low expectation level (back image of “city”) may be selected. There is. That is, the back image set based on the highly reliable back image selection table 222c1 makes it easy to predict the current variation pattern selection table (that is, the degree of advantage for the player) set for each special symbol. This is a so-called highly reliable back image. On the other hand, the back image set based on the low reliability back image selection table 222c2 is difficult to predict the current variation pattern selection table (that is, the degree of advantage for the player) set for each special symbol. This results in a so-called back image with low reliability.

Here, details of the high reliability back image selection table 222c1 will be described with reference to FIG. 117(c). The high-reliability back image selection table 222c1 indicates that in back image setting processing 7 (see FIG. 119), which will be described later, the value of the special drawing 1 consecutive lottery number counter is smaller than 10, and the value of the production counter 223g is "151 to 198". ”, the back image is referred to for selecting the back image (see S5055 in FIG. 119).

If the total value of the judgment values of the variable pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variable pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is "0", the production counter 223g The back image of "city" is set for the value "0-99" of the effect counter 223g, the back image of "mountain" is set for the value "100-189" of the effect counter 223g, and the background image of "mountain" is set for the value "190" of the effect counter 223g. ~198'', a background image of ``sandy beach'' is set.

If the total value of the judgment value is "1", the back image of "town" is set for the value "0-49" of the production counter 223g, and the background image of "town" is set for the value "50-149" of the production counter 223g. A back image of "mountain" is set for the value "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223g, and a back image of "sandy beach" is set for the value "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

If the total value of the judgment value is "2", the back image of "mountain" is set for the value "0-99" of the production counter 223g, and the back image of "mountain" is set for the value "100-179" of the production counter 223g. A back image of "sandy beach" is set for the value "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223g, and a back image of "sea floor" is set for the value "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

If the total value of the judgment value is "3", the back image of "mountain" is set for the value "0-49" of the production counter 223g, and the back image of "mountain" is set for the value "50-149" of the production counter 223g. A back image of "sandy beach" is set for the value "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223g, and a back image of "sea floor" is set for the value "150 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

If the total judgment value is "4", the back image of "sandy beach" is set for the value "0-49" of the production counter 223g, and the background image of "sandy beach" is set for the value "50-179" of the production counter 223g. The back image of "sea floor" is set for the value "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223g, and the back image of "school of fish" is set for the value "180 to 198" of the effect counter 223g.

Next, details of the low reliability back image selection table 222c2 will be described with reference to FIG. 117(d). The low reliability back image selection table 222c2 is set when the value of the special drawing 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is smaller than 10 and the value of the table selection production counter 223s is If it is "0 to 2", it is referenced to select the back image (see S5054 in FIG. 119).

If the total value of the judgment values of the variable pattern selection table set for the first special symbol and the variable pattern selection table set for the second special symbol is "0", the production counter 223g The back image of "city" is set for the value "0-99" of the effect counter 223g, the back image of "mountain" is set for the value "100-149" of the effect counter 223g, and the background image of "mountain" is set for the value "150" of the effect counter 223g. ~189'', the back image of ``sandy beach'' is set, and the value of the effect counter 223g is ``190~198'', the back image of ``sea floor'' is set.

If the total value of the judgment value is "1", the back image of "town" is set for the value "0-49" of the production counter 223g, and the background image of "town" is set for the value "50-149" of the production counter 223g. , the back image of "mountain" is set, the back image of "sandy beach" is set for the value "150 to 179" of the production counter 223g, and the back image of "sea floor" is set for the value "180 to 189" of the production counter 223g. The back image is set.

If the total value of the judgment value is "2", the back image of "town" is set for the value "0-49" of the production counter 223g, and the background image of "town" is set for the value "50-99" of the production counter 223g. , the back image of "mountain" is set, the back image of "sandy beach" is set for the value "100-179" of the production counter 223g, and the back image of "sea floor" is set for the value "180-198" of the production counter 223g. The back image of is set.

When the total value of the judgment value is "3", the back image of "town" is selected for the value "0-49" of the production counter 223g, and the back image of "town" is selected for the value "50-99" of the production counter 223g. , the back image of "mountain" is set, the back image of "sandy beach" is set for the value "100 to 149" of the production counter 223g, and the back image of "sea floor" is set for the value "150 to 198" of the production counter 223g. The back image of is set.

When the total value of the judgment value is "4", the back image of "town" is selected for the value "0-49" of the production counter 223g, and the back image of "town" is selected for the value "50-99" of the production counter 223g. , the back image of "mountain" is set, the back image of "sandy beach" is set for the value "100 to 149" of the production counter 223g, and the back image of "sea floor" is set for the value "150 to 189" of the production counter 223g. The back image of "School of Fish" is set for the value "190 to 198" of the production counter 223g.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the modification of the third embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. First, with reference to FIG. 118, the variable display setting process 7 (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The variable display setting process 7 (S2113) in this modification of the third embodiment has the following points: the process of S2671 and S2672 is added to the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 89) in the third embodiment, and The difference is that back image changing process 7 (S2651) is executed instead of the image changing process (see FIG. 90), and other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 7 (S2113), first, similarly to the third embodiment, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 variation start flag 223c is on in the process of S2601 (S2601: Yes), S2602 and The process of S2603 is executed. When the process of S2603 is finished, the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is incremented by 1 (S2671), and the process moves to S2604.

In the process of S2604, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223d is on (S2604: Yes), the processes of S2605 and S2606 are executed similarly to the third embodiment. When the process of S2606 is finished, the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S2672), and the process moves to S2607.

In this way, until the fluctuation based on the second special symbol starts, the value of the special drawing 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is not initialized, and increases by 1 every time the fluctuation based on the first special symbol starts. It will be added. As a result, if the value of the special drawing 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r is large, an illegal game in which the game ball is not entered into the second winning hole 64b and the game ball is only entered into the first winning hole 64a. can be determined to be running.

In the processing from S2607 to S2612, processing similar to the processing from S2607 to S2612 of the third embodiment is executed. Thereafter, back image change processing 7 is executed (S2651), and this processing is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 119, the back image selection process 7 (S2651) executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 118) will be described. The back image selection process 7 (S2651) in this modification of the third embodiment adds the processes of S5051 to S5055 in place of the process of S5003 to the back image selection process of the third embodiment (see FIG. 90). They are different in that respect, and are the same in other respects. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the back image selection process 7 (S2651), first, similarly to the third embodiment, the processes of S5001 and S5002 are executed, and the set variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol and the set variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol are The variation pattern selection table is determined (S5001, S5002).

After completing the process of S5002, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 consecutive lottery number counter is 10 or more (S5051). In the process of S5051, if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 1 consecutive lottery number counter is 10 or more (S5051: No), until a fluctuation pattern selection table advantageous for the player is set (that is, the expectation level There is a high possibility that an illegal game is being performed in which game balls are gradually introduced into the first winning hole 64a (until a high back image is displayed). Therefore, in this case, the back image of "town" is selected regardless of the set variation pattern selection table for each special symbol (S5052), and the process moves to S5004. As a result, even if a variable pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set, a highly anticipated back image will not be set, thereby preventing (suppressing) the above-mentioned illegal game from being executed. I can do it.

On the other hand, in the process of S5051, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 consecutive lottery number counter is smaller than 10 (S5051: Yes), the back In order to set the image, the process moves to S5053.

In the process of S5053, it is determined whether the value of the table selection performance counter 223s is between 0 and 2 (S5053). In the process of S5053, if it is determined that the value of the table selection rendering counter 223s is between 0 and 2 (S5053: Yes), a back image is selected using the low reliability back image selection table 222c2 (S5054). , the process moves to step S5004. Note that the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is updated between 0 and 3 as described above, so the probability that a back image is selected using the low reliability back image selection table 222c2 is 3/4. (75%).

On the other hand, in the process of S5053, if it is determined that the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is 3 (S5053: No), a back image is selected using the highly reliable back image selection table 222c1 and the effect counter 223. (S5055), and the process moves to S5004. Note that the value of the table selection effect counter 223s is updated between 0 and 3 as described above, so the probability that a back image is selected using the highly reliable back image selection table 222c1 is 1/4. (25%).

After the process in S5004, the process in S5004 to S5007 is executed similarly to the third embodiment, and the present process ends.

As described above, in the modified example of the third embodiment, the back image is set based on the combination of variable pattern selection tables set for each special symbol (i.e., the degree of advantage for the player). Ru. In this case, until a variable pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set (that is, until a highly anticipated back image is displayed), there may be fraud in which the game balls are gradually entered into the first winning hole 64a. There is a possibility that a game will be played. Therefore, in this modification, it is determined that the game ball has entered only the first winning hole 64a by counting the special drawing 1 consecutive lottery number counter 223r. When it is determined that the game ball has entered only the first winning hole 64a, the back image with a low expectation level (" The screen is configured to set the "back image of the town"). As a result, even if a variable pattern selection table advantageous to the player is set, a highly anticipated back image will not be set, so it is possible to prevent (suppress) the above-mentioned illegal game from being executed.

In this modification, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern selection table for each special symbol based on the degree to which it is advantageous to the player. Then, the degree of advantage for the player is determined based on the sum of the determination values of the variable pattern selection table for each special symbol that has been set, and the back image is selected. Therefore, it is not necessary to define the degree of advantage for the player in accordance with all the combinations of the variable pattern selection tables for each special symbol that have been set. This makes it possible to simplify the process of selecting a back image that suggests a degree of advantage for the player, and to reduce the processing load.

<Modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment, for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until one special symbol lottery is held), a variable pattern selection table advantageous to the player is displayed. is used to select the variation pattern of each special symbol. This makes it possible to increase the player's desire to participate in the game even after the jackpot game ends.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in this modification of the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is that the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 have been partially changed; The only difference is that some processes executed by the MPU 221 of the main control device 110 have been changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the fourth section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in modification of fourth embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 120(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this modification will be described. In this modification, a part of the variation pattern selection table 202f in the ROM 202 is changed. FIG. 120(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the post jackpot variation pattern selection table 202f in the variation pattern selection table 202f. The rest of the configuration of the ROM 202 is the same as that of the fourth embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (in this modification, until the fluctuation is executed once). A variation pattern is defined. As a result, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 64b during a jackpot game and the winning of the second special symbol is pending, after the end of the jackpot game, the fluctuation of the second special symbol becomes the first special symbol. It will be in a state where it will be stopped before the symbol changes. In other words, it is possible to create an advantageous situation for the player.

Specifically, when the number of selections remaining after the end of the jackpot is 1 or more, in the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 variation pattern A (variation time 5 seconds) is set, and in the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 variation pattern F (variation time 4 seconds) is set for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 120(b), compared to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 80), the RAM 203 of this modification has a remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special chart 1 jackpot, and a number of selections 203u remaining after the end of the special chart 2 jackpot. The difference is that the remaining number of selections 203v is added, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The number of selections remaining after the end of special figure 1 jackpot 203u is a counter for counting (measuring) a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until the variation of the first special symbol is executed once). It is. The remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is set to 1 when it is determined in jackpot control processing 8 (see FIG. 123) that it is the ending timing of the jackpot game (see S1491 in FIG. 123), In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (see FIG. 121), if a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table after the end of the jackpot, 1 is subtracted (see S552 in FIG. 121).

The number of selections remaining after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot 203v is a counter for counting (measuring) a predetermined period of time from the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until the variation of the second special symbol is executed once). It is. The remaining number of selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is set to 1 when it is determined in jackpot control processing 8 (see FIG. 123) that it is the ending timing of the jackpot game (see S1492 in FIG. 123), In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (see FIG. 122), if a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table after the end of the jackpot, 1 is subtracted (see S952 in FIG. 122).

<About the control process of the main controller in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123. First, with reference to FIG. 121, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304) in this modification of the fourth embodiment is different from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the fourth embodiment, and the processing from S551 to S554. The difference is that ``is added'', and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S304), first, similar to the fourth embodiment, the processes of S501 to S505 are executed. Then, the process moves to S551.

In the process of S551, it is determined whether the remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is greater than 0 (S551). In the process of S551, if it is determined that the remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 0 (S551: No), the current gaming state is changed for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, fluctuation is executed once). In this case, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S551, if it is determined that the remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is 1 (S551: Yes), the current gaming state is the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, so S552 Shift to processing.

In the process of S552, the value of the remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is subtracted by 1 (S552), and the process moves to S553. In the process of S553, it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted number of selections 203u remaining after the completion of one special map jackpot is 0 (S553). In addition, in this modification, since the value set to the remaining number of selections 203u after the end of one special chart jackpot is 1, the subtracted number of selections remaining after the end of one special chart jackpot 203u is always 0.

In the process of S553, if it is determined that the value of the number of selections 203u remaining after the special symbol 1 jackpot is 0 (S553: Yes), the current gaming state (status A to C) is determined for the first special symbol. ), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S553, if it is determined that the value of the remaining number of selections 203u after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot is not 0 (S553: No), the process of S554 is skipped and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704) in this modification of the fourth embodiment is different from the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 38) in the fourth embodiment, and the processing from S951 to S954. The difference is that ``is added'', and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S704), first, similar to the fourth embodiment, the processes of S901 to S905 are executed. Then, the process moves to S951.

In the process of S951, it is determined whether the remaining number of selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is greater than 0 (S951). In the process of S951, if it is determined that the number of selections 203v remaining after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 0 (S951: No), the current gaming state is changed for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (in this embodiment, the fluctuation is executed once). In this case, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S951, if it is determined that the remaining number of selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is 1 (S951: Yes), the current gaming state is the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, so S952 Shift to processing.

In the process of S952, the value of the remaining number of selections 203v after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is subtracted by 1 (S952), and the process moves to S953. In the process of S953, it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted number of selections 203u remaining after the end of the special drawing 2 jackpot is 0 (S953). In addition, in this modification, since the value set to the remaining number of selections 203v after the end of the special drawing 2 jackpot is 1, the subtracted number of selections 203v remaining after the end of the special drawing 2 jackpot is always 0.

In the process of S953, if it is determined that the value of the number of selections 203v remaining after the end of the special symbol 2 jackpot is 0 (S953: Yes), the current gaming state (status A to C) is determined for the second special symbol. ), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S953, if it is determined that the value of the number of selections 203v remaining after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot is not 0 (S953: No), the process of S954 is skipped and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, jackpot control processing 8 (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. The jackpot control process 8 (S1304) in this modification of the fourth embodiment is different from the jackpot control process in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 45) in that the processes from S1491 to S1493 are added, and other The points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S1304), first, similar to the fourth embodiment, the processes of S1401 to S1409 are executed. In the process of S1409, if it is determined that it is the ending timing of the jackpot game (S1409), an ending command is set (S1410), the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1411), and the process moves to S1491.

In the process of S1491, the special figure 1 jackpot remaining variation count 203u is set to 1 (S1491), and then the special figure 2 jackpot remaining variation count 203v is set to 1 (S1492). By setting each jackpot remaining fluctuation number through the processing of S1491 and S1492, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming state is in a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game.

When the process of S1492 is finished, the post jackpot variation pattern selection table 202f is set as the variation pattern selection table for the first special symbol (S1493). Then, the post-jackpot variation pattern selection table 202f is set as the variation pattern selection table for the second special symbol (S1494), and the process ends. Through the processing of S1493 and S1494, during a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot, a variation can be executed in a variation pattern different from the normal time (the variation of the second special symbol stops first).

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment, for a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game (in this embodiment, until one special symbol lottery is held), It is configured to select a variation pattern for each special symbol using an advantageous variation pattern selection table. This makes it possible to increase the player's desire to participate in the game even after the jackpot game ends.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

The embodiments described above may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristics Group A> (Configuration in which special figure 1 always changes when special figure 2 starts changing due to simultaneous fluctuation)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a ball entering means which sets a period during which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means. a control means; dynamically displaying first identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means; and based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means; comprising a display means for dynamically displaying second identification information, and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player when the specific second identification information is displayed on the display means; The ball entry control means is characterized in that when setting the second ball entry means to the period during which the ball entry is possible, it is within a predetermined period after the game ball enters the first ball entry means. A gaming machine A1.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There are bonus games that are advantageous. In such a configuration, a gaming machine has been proposed that provides a plurality of types of bonus games by controlling the opening and closing of two ball entrances. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-265765). Such gaming machines only perform control to switch the ball entry openings that are opened as bonus games, and there has been a need to further improve the interest of the games. Furthermore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine A1, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball into which the game ball can enter. ball entry control means for setting a period of time; first identification information is dynamically displayed based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entry means; and a game ball enters the second ball entry means. a display means for dynamically displaying second identification information based on the fact that the player has hit a ball; and a benefit provision system that provides a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the specific second identification information is displayed on the display means. When setting the second ball entry means to the period during which ball entry is possible, the ball entry control means controls a predetermined amount of time after the game ball enters the first ball entry means. It is within the period. As a result, when a game ball enters the second ball entry means, the game ball enters the first entry means before that, so the first identification information is dynamically displayed first. Since the dynamic display of the second identification information to which a reward can be given can be configured to be executed later, the player may be asked to display the first identification information in anticipation of the dynamic display of the second identification information. You can show dynamic displays. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved. Moreover, since the frequency of dynamic display of the second identification information can be suppressed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive provision of benefits.

In the game machine A1, the ball entry control means is variable between a first state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the first state. a variable member; and a variable control means for varying the variable member from the first state to the second state until a predetermined condition is satisfied; A game machine A2 characterized in that the variable member is made variable by the variable control means.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the ball entry control means is a variable member that is variable between a first state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state that makes it more difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry means. , variable control means for varying the variable member from the first state to the second state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the variable member is set to the first state as a period during which the game ball can enter the ball. The member is made variable by the variable control means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the second identification information is dynamically displayed before the first identification information.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the benefit granting means is capable of granting a benefit that is more disadvantageous to the player than the benefit when the predetermined first identification information is displayed on the display means. A gaming machine A3 featuring:

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the benefit granting means is capable of granting a benefit that is more disadvantageous to the player than the benefit when the predetermined first identification information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the dynamic display of the second identification information.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the second ball entering means, after the game ball enters the first ball entering means, displays a first ball entering device that is shorter than the shortest dynamic display period of the first identification information. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is placed in a position where it can enter the ball within a period of time.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second ball entry means is configured to locate a position where the game ball can enter within a first period shorter than the shortest dynamic display period of the first identification information after the game ball enters the first ball entry means. It is located in Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball can be entered into the second ball entry means during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, dynamic display execution means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means; and the predetermined first identification information. When a dynamic display displayed with information and a dynamic display displayed with the specific second identification information are executed simultaneously, the dynamic display is displayed first with the predetermined first identification information. terminating means for displaying the dynamic display of the specific second identification information with the second identification information different from the specific second identification information and forcibly terminating the dynamic display when the display is terminated. A game machine A5 characterized by being a game machine.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, dynamic display execution means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on a display means, and a dynamic display that is displayed using the predetermined first identification information. , when the dynamic display displayed using the specific second identification information is executed at the same time, when the dynamic display is displayed first using the predetermined first identification information and the dynamic display ends, the specific and a termination means for displaying the dynamic display of the second identification information using the second identification information different from the specific second identification information and forcibly terminating the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to vary the advantages and disadvantages depending on the dynamic display period that is executed with the first identification information and the second identification information, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a novel gaming experience.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the ball entry control means includes a detection means for detecting passage of a game ball that enters the first ball entry means, and a detection means for detecting passage of a game ball that enters the first ball entry means; and a period determining means for determining a period until the variable member is varied from the first state to the second state by the variable control means.

According to gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A2 to A5, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the ball entry control means includes a detection means for detecting the passage of a game ball that enters the first ball entry means, and a control means for controlling the ball by the variable control means based on the detection by the detection means. The apparatus further includes a period determining means for determining a period during which the variable member is changed from the first state to the second state. Therefore, the benefit given to the player can be varied depending on the period determined by the period determining means, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6 includes a determining means for performing determination based on whether a game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the determining means identifies the game ball. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that when the determination result is determined, the specific second identification information is displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine A7, advantageous benefits are given to the player when a specific determination result is determined in any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, so that the player's interest can be improved. .

In the gaming machine A7, if the determining means determines a special determination result, the special benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the benefit is awarded by the benefit granting means. Machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, a special benefit that is more advantageous to the player is provided, so that the game has the effect of being able to give a fresh feeling to the game.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter, and a ball entry means for the variable ball entry means. The variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state based on the specific area in which the game ball that has been entered can enter based on the establishment of the passage condition, and the privilege is awarded by the privilege granting means. and variable control means for changing the state, and the privilege granting means is characterized in that when a game ball enters the specific area, a special benefit that is more advantageous than the privilege is provided. Game machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, it is possible to make the player expect that the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means will pass through a specific area, and the game can be improved. It has the effect of increasing interest.

<Characteristics Group B> (simultaneous fluctuation, setting misses to small hits, short opening for special 1 small hits, long opening for special 2 small hits)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a first ball entering means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. determining means for performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means; first identification information based on the determination result of the first determination; a display means for simultaneously displaying second identification information based on the determination result of the determination; and a dynamic display capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information respectively on the display means. an execution means; a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information respectively executed by the dynamic display execution means; A first bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed, and a game that is more advantageous than the first bonus game when the second identification information based on a specific determination result is displayed. a bonus game execution means that executes a second bonus game that is advantageous to the player; and the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result and the second identification information based on the specific second determination result, respectively, at the same time. If the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result is completed first, the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is dynamically displayed. It is characterized by comprising a termination means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the display using the second identification information indicating a determination result based on a determination result different from the specific second determination result. Game machine B1.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There are bonus games that are advantageous. In such a configuration, a gaming machine has been proposed that provides a plurality of types of bonus games by controlling the opening and closing of two ball entrances. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-265765). Such gaming machines only perform control to switch the ball entry openings that are opened as bonus games, and there has been a need to further improve the interest of the games. Furthermore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine B1, there is a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball enters the first ball entering means. determining means for performing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means; and a determining means for performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means; display means for simultaneously displaying the first identification information and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination, and dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, respectively. a dynamic display execution means capable of performing a dynamic display execution means, and a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information respectively executed by the dynamic display execution means; A first bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, and when the second identification information is displayed based on a specific determination result, the a bonus game execution means capable of executing a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game; and a bonus game execution means based on the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result and the specific second determination result. If the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined first determination result is completed first, the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the same time. terminating means for forcibly terminating the dynamic display by displaying the second identification information based on the second identification information indicating a discrimination result based on a discrimination result different from the specific second discrimination result; , has. Therefore, by stopping the dynamic display of the second identification information before the dynamic display of the first identification information, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute advantageous bonus games, and it is possible to provide novel gameplay. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B1, there is provided a specific ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means. a special privilege game execution means to be executed; and an operation means for operating the ball entry guide member with a first action that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means and a second action that makes it more difficult for the ball to enter the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine B2, characterized in that the operating means is capable of executing the first operation more easily when the second bonus game is executed than the first bonus game.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, there is a special ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a special game that executes a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means. It has a bonus game execution means, and an operation means for operating the ball entry guide member with a first action that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means and a second action that makes it more difficult for the ball to enter the specific ball entry means. However, the operation means is such that it is easier to execute the first operation when the second bonus game is executed than the first bonus game. Therefore, by the second bonus game that is executed when the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed, the bonus for the player can be varied depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in multiple stages.

In the gaming machine B2, the operation means sets a longer period for the first operation than for the second operation to operate the ball entry guide member to a position where the game ball can enter the specific ball entry means. A game machine B3 is characterized in that it is a game machine that

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the operating means sets a period during which the ball entry guiding member is moved to a position where the game ball can enter the specific ball entry means during the first action to be longer than during the second action. be. Therefore, advantages and disadvantages can be switched with easy control, and the control load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball, and the first bonus game or the second bonus game. variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is met, the specific ball entry means controlling the variable ball entry means A game machine B4 is arranged at a position where a game ball that enters the ball can enter the game machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is executed, the variable ball entry means is brought into the first state, and the variable ball entry means is switched to the specific ball entry means. Since the player is given the opportunity to enter the ball, there is an effect that the value of the first bonus game or the second bonus game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, when the first bonus game is executed, the operation means executes the first operation before the variable ball entry means enters the first state, and then executes the first operation. 2 operations are executed, and when the second bonus game is executed, the first operation is executed during a period in which the variable ball entry means is in the first state. Game machine B5.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B4, there is an effect that the game ball can be easily entered into the specific ball entry means during the second bonus game, and the value of the second bonus game can be improved.

In either of the gaming machines B4 and B5, the first bonus game and the second bonus game are ones in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state the same number of times. B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B4 or B5, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the difference between the first bonus game and the second bonus game from being determined from the operation of the variable ball entry means. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the problem of determining whether or not to enter the specific ball entry means based on the type of bonus game.

<Characteristics Group C> (Give different types of small wins, and switch the special 2 fluctuation table with the small win of special 1)
a determining means for performing a first determination based on the satisfaction of a first condition and a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition; and a first determination based on the determination result of the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying identification information and second identification information based on a determination result of the second determination, and a display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, respectively. and variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the display of the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result. A gaming machine C1 characterized by having:

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There are bonus games that are advantageous. In such a configuration, a gaming machine has been proposed that provides a plurality of types of bonus games by controlling the opening and closing of two ball entrances. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-265765). Such gaming machines only perform control to switch the ball entry openings that are opened as bonus games, and there has been a need to further improve the interest of the games. Furthermore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine C1, a determining means executes a first determination based on the establishment of a first condition and executes a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition, and the first determination by the determining means. display means for displaying first identification information based on the determination result of the second determination and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying each, and a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the display of the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result; It has a variable control means for varying the temperature. Therefore, by displaying the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result, the dynamic display period executed for the second identification information is varied, so the gameplay can be varied depending on the determination result of the first determination. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C1, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it has a privilege granting means for granting a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the second benefit when the player receives the second benefit.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, and a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is provided when the second identification information is displayed based on the specific determination result. The game player has a benefit granting means for granting a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the second benefit. Therefore, since the dynamic display period determined by the second determination which is advantageous to the player is varied depending on the determination result of the first determination, the player is made interested in the display of the first identification information which is less profitable. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the dynamic display execution means is configured to be able to simultaneously dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and displays the predetermined determination result. When the first identification information based on the determination result and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ends first. Then, the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result is ended by displaying the second identification information based on a determination result different from the specific determination result. Gaming machine C3 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display execution means is configured to be able to simultaneously dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, if the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ends first, the specific and terminating means for terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, if the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short, it is advantageous for the player, and has the effect of making the player expect that the second identification information will be dynamically displayed in a short dynamic display period and play the game. .

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is performed based on predetermined priority conditions, giving priority to the dynamic display of the identification information set as priority. A gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it has a priority means for.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is set as a priority based on predetermined priority conditions. The present invention has priority means for giving priority to dynamic display of identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively; a setting means for setting a type of a dynamic display period group for which the dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means, and the setting means is configured such that the first identification information indicating the predetermined determination result is A gaming machine C5 characterized in that the dynamic display period group corresponding to the second identification information can be variably set based on the display.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and the dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information. a setting means for setting a type of a dynamic display period group for which a target display period is determined, and the setting means is configured to: The dynamic display period group corresponding to the second identification information can be variably set. Therefore, there is an effect that the advantages and disadvantages of the game can be easily varied by the dynamic display period group set by the setting means.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, if the determining means determines a special determination result by the first determination or the second determination, the first benefit and the second benefit may be given to the player. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that an advantageous special benefit is granted by the benefit granting means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that a special determination result will be obtained.

A gaming machine C7, which is any one of the gaming machines C2 to C6, and is set such that the second privilege is granted when a special condition is met.

According to the gaming machine C7, a special benefit is granted when a special condition is satisfied in any of the gaming machines C2 to C6, so that it is possible to provide a further advantageous benefit to the player. This has the effect of increasing the attractiveness of the second benefit.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C7, variable ball entry means is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter, and a variable ball entry means for the variable ball entry means. The variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the specific area where the game ball can enter based on the fulfillment of the passage condition and the second privilege is awarded by the privilege awarding means. a variable control means for changing the state to a first state, and the privilege granting means grants the special privilege when a game ball enters the specific area.C8 .

According to the game machine C8, it is possible to make the player expect that the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means will pass through a specific area, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature D group> (Always SP in small hits where special 2 variation pattern is switched)
A discriminating means that performs a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first condition, a display means that displays first identification information based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a display means that displays the first identification information. a dynamic display mode for determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display section based on the determination result; a bonus game execution means that executes a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information indicating a determination result of , and a bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means; , a specific ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter, a first action that allows the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means, and a second action that makes it more difficult to enter the ball than the first action. an operating means for operating the operating member; and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means, and the benefit granting means is configured to perform the discrimination. The benefit is granted even when the first identification information is displayed based on a special determination result by the means, and the first dynamic display determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. The mode includes at least a special dynamic display mode in which a determination ratio is set to be high when the result is the special discrimination result, and the special dynamic display mode is set when the result is the predetermined discrimination result. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode based on the dynamic display mode determining means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There are bonus games that are advantageous. In such a configuration, a gaming machine has been proposed that provides a plurality of types of bonus games by controlling the opening and closing of two ball entrances. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-265765). Such gaming machines only perform control to switch the ball entry openings that are opened as bonus games, and there has been a need to further improve the interest of the games. Furthermore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine D1, a determining means for performing a first determination based on the establishment of a first condition, a display means for displaying first identification information based on a determination result by the determining means, and a display means for displaying first identification information based on a determination result by the determining means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; and dynamic display means for determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the determination result. a display mode determining means; a bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information indicating a predetermined determination result is displayed; and a bonus game execution unit that executes a first bonus game advantageous to the player; When a game is executed, a specific ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a first action that allows a game ball to enter the specific ball entry means, and a ball that is more difficult to enter than the first action. an operating means for operating the operating member to perform a second action, and a privilege granting means for awarding an advantageous privilege to the player when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means, The benefit granting means grants the benefit even when the first identification information is displayed based on a special determination result by the determining means, and the benefit is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. The first dynamic display mode includes at least a special dynamic display mode in which a high determination rate is set in the case of the special determination result, and the special dynamic display mode is set to the first dynamic display mode. This is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the determining means executes a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, and the display means performs a second determination based on the determination result of the second determination. Second identification information is displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information, and the bonus game execution means displays the second identification information based on a specific determination result. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the gaming machine D2 is configured to be able to execute a second bonus game with fewer benefits than the first bonus game when information is displayed.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the discrimination means executes a second discrimination based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, and the display means executes a second discrimination based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination. information is displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information, and the bonus game execution means displays the second identification information based on a specific determination result. If the bonus game is played, a second bonus game with fewer bonuses than the first bonus game can be executed. Therefore, the advantages and disadvantages for the player can be varied between the first determination and the second determination, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D2, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the second bonus game is set to have a shorter period in which the operating member is in the first action than the first bonus game.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the period in which the operating member is in the first motion is set to be shorter in the second bonus game than in the first bonus game, so that the bonus is There is an effect that it is possible to easily make it difficult to be applied.

A gaming machine D4, which is any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, wherein the special dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode in which there is a high expectation that a privilege will be awarded by the privilege awarding means.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the special dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode in which there is a high expectation that a privilege will be awarded by the privilege granting means. Even if the game is not awarded, the first bonus game is executed, which has the effect of reducing the player's disappointment.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the dynamic display means is capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. Machine D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, the first identification information and the second identification information can be dynamically displayed at the same time in any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, so that the game can be played efficiently. .

In the gaming machine D5, when the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed at the same time, a termination means for forcibly terminating the other dynamic display based on the termination of one dynamic display. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that it has the following.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D5, the dynamic display of one side is forcibly ended in synchronization with the end timing of the dynamic display of one side, so that more efficient games can be played. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine D6, when the dynamic display is forcibly terminated by the termination means, it is regulated that advantageous benefits are not granted to the player based on the identification information for which the dynamic display is terminated. A gaming machine D7 is characterized in that it has a regulating means.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D6, the provision of benefits is regulated by the regulating means, so that the gambling nature can be suppressed.

<Feature E group> (Switches the special 1 and special 2 fluctuation tables depending on the number of fluctuations)
a determining means for executing a first determination based on the satisfaction of a first condition and a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition; and a first determination result of the first determination by the determination means. a display means for displaying first identification information based on the determination result and second identification information based on the second determination result that is the determination result of the second determination, and the first determination result specific to the display means. a bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information based on the second identification information or the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed; dynamic display execution means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information; and a dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. and a dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively, and a plurality of dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information by the dynamic display period determining means. A first dynamic display period group in which a dynamic display period is set and a second dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods are set for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information. and a group determining means for determining each type, the group determining means changing the type of the first dynamic display period group or the second dynamic display period group, respectively, based on establishment of a change condition. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the gaming machine E1 makes a decision based on the following.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There are bonus games that are advantageous. In such a configuration, a gaming machine has been proposed that provides a plurality of types of bonus games by controlling the opening and closing of two ball entrances. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-265765). Such gaming machines only perform control to switch the ball entry openings that are opened as bonus games, and there has been a need to further improve the interest of the games. Furthermore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine E1, a determining means executes a first determination based on the establishment of a first condition and executes a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition, and the first determination by the determining means. a display means for displaying first identification information based on a first discrimination result that is a discrimination result of the second discrimination, and second identification information based on a second discrimination result that is a discrimination result of the second discrimination; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when first identification information based on the specific first determination result or second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed; , dynamic display execution means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means; and the first identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information; and a dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information. a first dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods are set for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information; and a second dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information are set. a group determining means for determining the type of the dynamic display period group, and the group determining means is configured to select the first dynamic display period group or the second dynamic display period group based on establishment of a change condition. This is determined by changing the type of each period group. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E1, when the first identification information and the second identification information are simultaneously dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, either the first identification information or the second identification information If the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the specific first discrimination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second discrimination result ends before the other, the dynamic display of the other A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it has a stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display by displaying the first identification information or the second identification information corresponding to a predetermined determination result.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, when the first identification information and the second identification information are simultaneously dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, the first identification information and the second identification information, one of which is a dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the specific first discrimination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second discrimination result before the other. and a stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display by displaying the other dynamic display with the first identification information or the second identification information corresponding to a predetermined determination result. This has the effect of making the player expect that the dynamic display of the second identification information will be finished first.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a dynamic display period longer than a predetermined first period is determined as the first dynamic display period group and the second dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means. a long first dynamic display period group and a long second dynamic display period group that are likely to be determined, and a short first dynamic display period group and a short second dynamic display period that are likely to have a shorter dynamic display period than the first period. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that at least a display period group is set.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first dynamic display period group and the second dynamic display period group determined by the group determining means have a predetermined first dynamic display period group. A long first dynamic display period group, a long second dynamic display period group for which a dynamic display period longer than one period is likely to be determined, and a short first dynamic display period group for which a dynamic display period shorter than the first period is likely to be determined. Since at least the dynamic display period group and the short second dynamic display period group are set, there is an effect that the gameplay can be varied by switching the dynamic display mode group.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the predetermined determination result is set to a determination result in which no advantage is given to the player.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2 or E3, since no benefits advantageous to the player are provided, the gaming machine E4 has the effect of suppressing an increase in the gambling nature.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball, and a A gaming machine E5 characterized in that it has variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means from two states to the first state.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the variable entry means is changed to the first state, so that it is easy for the player to understand that a bonus game is being executed. It has the effect of being able to be recognized.

In the gaming machine E5, a specific area in which a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means can enter, a regulation state that restricts entry of the game ball into the specific area, and a release state that releases the regulation. and variable means that is variable, and the bonus game execution means executes a special bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the bonus game when a game ball enters the specific area. A game machine E6 characterized by being a game machine.

In the gaming machine E6, the variable means is configured such that the bonus game executed based on the specific second determination result is in the released state more than the bonus game executed based on the specific first determination result. A gaming machine E7 characterized in that the settings are easily variable.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E6, there is an effect that the second identification information stops before the first identification information, so that it can be more advantageous to the player.

<Characteristics Group F> (Configuration of special 1 no reservation, special 2 reservation 1, aiming to win special 2 during jackpot or small win)
A first determination is performed based on a first ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the ball entering the first ball entering means. , a determining means for performing a second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, and first identification information based on a first determination result that is a determination result of the first determination by the determining means; a display means on which second identification information based on a second discrimination result that is a discrimination result of the second discrimination is displayed, and first identification information based on the specific first discrimination result is displayed on the display means. When a first bonus game that is more advantageous to the player is executed and second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, a first bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game is executed. 2. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, a dynamic display execution means capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display thereof. dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the execution means; storage means for storing a right to execute the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means when the target is displayed; 1 identification information or the specific second identification information is displayed, the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information during the dynamic display period is performed using a method other than the specific first determination result. or a termination means for forcibly displaying a determination result other than the specific second determination result and ending the dynamic display, and the dynamic display period determining means is configured to dynamically display the first identification information. The dynamic display period of the second identification information, which is longer than the display period, is configured to be easy to determine, and when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is not being executed, the storage means stores the determination information. Execution right control means that makes it difficult for the right to be stored and makes it easy to store the execution right in the storage means when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is being executed. Gaming machine F1 is characterized by:

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There are bonus games that are advantageous. In such a configuration, a gaming machine has been proposed that provides a plurality of types of bonus games by controlling the opening and closing of two ball entrances. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-265765). Such gaming machines only perform control to switch the ball entry openings that are opened as bonus games, and there has been a need to further improve the interest of the games. Furthermore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine F1, there is a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a second ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter, based on the ball entering the first ball entering means. , a determining means for performing a first determination and performing a second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, and a first determination result that is a determination result of the first determination by the determining means. display means for displaying first identification information based on the first discrimination result and second identification information based on the second discrimination result which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination; A first bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the first bonus game is more advantageous than the first bonus game. a bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game that is advantageous to the player; and a dynamic display execution capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. and dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means; A memory for storing the right to execute the second determination by the determining means up to a predetermined number of times based on a game ball entering the second ball entering means when the second identification information is dynamically displayed. and means for displaying the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information during the dynamic display period when the specific first identification information or the specific second identification information is displayed. terminating means for forcibly displaying the dynamic display with a determination result other than the first determination result or other than the specific second determination result, and the dynamic display period determining means includes: The dynamic display period of the second identification information, which is longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information, is easily determined, and when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is not being executed, , execution right control means for making it difficult for the discrimination right to be stored in the storage means, and for making it easy to store the execution right in the storage means when the first bonus game or the second bonus game is being executed; It has the following. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the execution right will be stored during the bonus game, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the gaming machine F1 has a delaying means for delaying ball entry so that game balls enter the second ball entry means one by one at intervals equal to or more than a predetermined interval.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1, it has a delaying means for delaying ball entry so that the game balls enter the second ball entering means one by one at intervals of a predetermined interval or more. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent execution rights from being stored.

The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine F1 or F2, the predetermined interval is a period shorter than the execution period of the first bonus game.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the predetermined interval is a period shorter than the execution period of the first bonus game, so that the first bonus game is This has the effect of making it easier to remember the execution right when it is executed.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, there is a specific area in which a game ball can enter, a first state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the specific area, and a first state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the specific area. a variable member capable of changing between two states; and variable control means for changing the variable member between the second state and the first state; When the first bonus game is performed, the variable member is more easily changed to the first state than the second state, and when the second bonus game is performed, the variable member is changed to the first state more easily than the second state. A game machine F4 characterized in that the game machine F4 is capable of changing to the second state more easily than the first state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is possible to change between a specific area where a game ball can enter, a first state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the specific area, and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the specific area. a variable member, and variable control means for changing the variable member to either the second state or the first state, and the variable control means is configured to perform the first bonus game. In this case, the variable member is more easily changed to the first state than the second state, and when the second bonus game is executed, the variable member is changed to the second state rather than the first state. Since the bonuses can be easily varied, benefits can be given in stages, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest.

In any of the game machines F1 to F4, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state where a game ball can enter and a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball, and execution of the first bonus game or the second bonus game. and variable control means for varying the variable ball entrance means to the open state based on the above.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F4, the variable ball entry means is opened based on the execution of the first privilege game or the second privilege game, so that the first privilege game Alternatively, there is an effect that it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the second bonus game is being played.

In the gaming machine F5, the specific area is arranged at a position where a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means can enter the gaming machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, it is possible to provide an opportunity to enter a specific area based on the execution of the first bonus game or the second bonus game, which increases the interest of the game. It has the effect of improving the

A gaming machine F7 in any one of the gaming machines F2 to F6, wherein the delay means has a rolling surface capable of rolling the game ball for a period longer than the predetermined interval.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F2 to F6, there is an effect that a predetermined interval or more can be secured by a rolling surface that can be rolled for a period of a predetermined interval or more. be.

<Feature G group> (Configuration that restricts the occurrence of suspension in special 2)
A first determination is performed based on a first ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the ball entering the first ball entering means. , a determining means for performing a second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, and first identification information based on a first determination result that is a determination result of the first determination by the determining means; a display means on which second identification information based on a second discrimination result that is a discrimination result of the second discrimination is displayed, and first identification information based on the specific first discrimination result is displayed on the display means. When a first bonus game that is more advantageous to the player is executed and second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, a first bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game is executed. 2. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display execution means. dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the means; storage means for storing the execution right of the second determination by the determination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance means when the display is displayed; It is characterized by having a state setting means that can switch and set a first state in which the execution right is more likely to be stored and a second state in which the execution right is more difficult to be stored than in the first state. Game machine G1.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There are bonus games that are advantageous. In such a configuration, a gaming machine has been proposed that provides a plurality of types of bonus games by controlling the opening and closing of two ball entrances. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-265765). Such gaming machines only perform control to switch the ball entry openings that are opened as bonus games, and there has been a need to further improve the interest of the games. Furthermore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine G1, there is a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball that enters the ball based on the ball entering the first ball entering means. , a determining means for performing a first determination and performing a second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, and a first determination result that is a determination result of the first determination by the determining means. display means for displaying first identification information based on the first discrimination result and second identification information based on the second discrimination result which is the discrimination result of the second discrimination; A first bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information is displayed is executed, and when the second identification information based on the specific second determination result is displayed, the first bonus game is more advantageous than the first bonus game. a bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game that is advantageous to the player; and a dynamic display execution means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, respectively. and dynamic display period determining means for respectively determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means; Storage means for storing the execution right of the second determination by the determining means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means when the second identification information is dynamically displayed. and a state setting means capable of switching and setting a first state in which the execution right is more likely to be stored in the storage means and a second state in which the execution right is more difficult to be stored than in the first state. It is. Therefore, since it is possible to create a special state in which the game balls enter the second ball entry means consecutively, it is possible to diversify the interests of the players and improve the enjoyment of the game.

A game characterized in that the game machine G1 has a delay means for delaying the interval between the input balls of the game balls to an interval equal to or more than the first interval when the game balls enter the second ball input means. Machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, when a game ball enters the second ball entering means, a delay means delays the entry interval of the game ball to an interval equal to or more than the first interval. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily prevent game balls from continuously entering the second ball entering means.

In gaming machine G2, the delaying means is arranged at a position where it can guide the second ball entering means, and includes a rolling means capable of rolling the game ball for more than the first period, and the rolling means. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that it has a guide section that guides the game ball that has been rolling for the first period or more to the second ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the delay means is arranged at a position where it can be guided to the second ball entering means, and includes a rolling means that can roll the game ball for more than the first period, and a rolling means that is arranged in a position that can guide the game ball to the second ball entering means. It has a guide part that guides the game ball that has been rolling for a period of time or more to the second ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution right from being stored in a period other than the bonus game.

In the gaming machines G1 to G3, the state setting means switches to and sets the first state based on the execution of the first bonus game or the second bonus game. Game machine G4.

In the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G3, by executing the first bonus game or the second bonus game, the execution right is easily memorized, and only the dynamic display of the second identification information is performed. This has the effect of making it easier to Therefore, there is an effect that the second bonus game advantageous to the player can be easily executed.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, and the first bonus game or the second bonus game is executed. a variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means to the open state based on the variable ball entry means; a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter; and a game ball placed in the specific area. A gaming machine G5, characterized in that it has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player based on the fact that a player has entered a ball.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, by executing the first bonus game or the second bonus game, an opportunity to enter the game ball into a specific area is given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, the benefits given by the benefit giving means include keeping the variable ball entry means open until a predetermined condition is met, or setting a high probability of being determined as a specific first determination result or second determination result, etc. corresponds to

In the gaming machine G5, the second bonus game is set to allow a game ball to enter the specific area more easily than the first bonus game.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, by executing the second privilege game, the privilege can be easily awarded, and the execution right to dynamically display the second identification information is stored. This has the effect of making it more valuable.

<Characteristic H group> (Give different types of small hits, and switch the variation table of special 2 with the small winning of special 1. Shift by the number of variations on the special figure 1 side)
a determining means for performing a first determination based on the satisfaction of a first condition and a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition; and a first determination based on the determination result of the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying identification information and second identification information based on a determination result of the second determination, and a display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, respectively. and variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information when a variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information is satisfied. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it has the following.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There are bonus games that are advantageous. In such a configuration, a gaming machine has been proposed that provides a plurality of types of bonus games by controlling the opening and closing of two ball entrances. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-265765). Such gaming machines only perform control to switch the ball entry openings that are opened as bonus games, and there has been a need to further improve the interest of the games. Furthermore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine H1, a determining means executes a first determination based on the establishment of a first condition and executes a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition, and the first determination by the determining means. display means for displaying first identification information based on the determination result of the second determination and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying each; and dynamic display in the dynamic display of the second identification information when a variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information is satisfied. It has variable control means for varying the period. Therefore, when the variable condition that is satisfied when the first identification information is displayed is satisfied, the dynamic display period that is executed for the second identification information is changed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. There is. If second identification information with a short variation time is likely to be selected, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed efficiently. Note that the variable condition here corresponds to a display mode in which the first identification information is displayed, a predetermined number of times of dynamic display, and the like.

In the gaming machine H1, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it has a privilege granting means for granting a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the second benefit when the player receives the second benefit.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, and a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is provided when the second identification information is displayed based on the specific determination result. The present invention includes a benefit granting means for granting a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the two major benefits. Therefore, since the dynamic display period determined by the second determination which is advantageous to the player is varied depending on the determination result of the first determination, the player is made interested in the display of the first identification information which is less profitable. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine H2, the gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the variable condition is established based on the display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, the first privilege having fewer benefits than the second privilege is executed; This has the effect of making the player expect the variable condition to be satisfied, and increasing the player's interest.

In gaming machine H2, gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the variable condition is established based on the number of dynamic display times of the first identification information being a predetermined number of times or more than a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the number of times the first identification information is dynamically displayed also has the effect of making the player interested and improving the interest in the game. be.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H4, the dynamic display execution means is configured to be able to simultaneously dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and When the first identification information based on the determination result and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is and terminating means for terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result by displaying the second identification information based on a determination result different from the specific determination result if the display is terminated first. A game machine H5 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display execution means is configured to be able to simultaneously dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, if the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ends first, the specific and terminating means for terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, if the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short, it is advantageous for the player, and has the effect of making the player expect that the second identification information will be dynamically displayed in a short dynamic display period and play the game. .

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, priority is given to the dynamic display of the identification information set as priority based on predetermined priority conditions for dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information. A gaming machine H6, characterized in that it has a priority means for executing.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is prioritized based on predetermined priority conditions. Since the present invention has a priority means that prioritizes and executes the dynamic display of the set identification information, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively; setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group for which the dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means, and the setting means is configured to set the type of the dynamic display period group for which the dynamic display period is determined by the variable condition determining means, A gaming machine H7 characterized in that the dynamic display period group corresponding to identification information can be set variably.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and the dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information. a setting means for setting a type of a dynamic display period group for which a target display period is determined; It is configured such that the display period group can be set variably. Therefore, there is an effect that the advantages and disadvantages of the game can be easily varied by the dynamic display period group set by the setting means.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H7, if the discrimination means determines a special discrimination result by the first discrimination or the second discrimination, the player receives a special discrimination result from the first privilege and the second privilege. A gaming machine H8, characterized in that an advantageous special benefit is granted by the benefit granting means.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that a special determination result will be obtained.

A gaming machine H9, which is any one of the gaming machines H2 to H8, and is set such that the second privilege is granted when a special condition is met.

According to the gaming machine H9, a special benefit is granted when a special condition is satisfied in any of the gaming machines H2 to H8, so that it is possible to further provide advantageous benefits to the player. This has the effect of increasing the attractiveness of the second benefit.

In any of the game machines H2 to H9, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter, and a ball entry means for the variable ball entry means. The variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the specific area where the game ball can enter based on the fulfillment of the passage condition and the second privilege is awarded by the privilege awarding means. a variable control means for changing the state to a first state, and the privilege granting means grants the special privilege when a game ball enters the specific area. H10.

According to the game machine H10, it is possible to make the player expect that the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means will pass through a specific area, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H10, the gaming machine H11 is characterized in that the special privilege is a privilege game that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H10, a bonus game is executed as a special benefit, so that the player's interest can be further improved. Here, when the second benefit is granted, the second identification information may be granted by stopping before the first identification information, so the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short. There is an effect that the player can play the game with interest because the variable control means allows the player to play the game with interest.

The gaming machine H10 includes a bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the determination unit determines that the result is a specific first determination result or a specific second determination result, and the special A gaming machine H12 characterized in that the privilege is such that the probability that the determining means determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is set high until a predetermined condition is met.

According to the gaming machine H12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H11, as a special benefit, the probability of being determined as a specific first discrimination result or a specific second discrimination result is set to be high, so that the player This has the effect of increasing the value of the second benefit.

<Characteristics Group I> (Special 1 small hit, special 2 fluctuation variable. Transition at the ceiling on the special map 1 side. H group similar version)
a determining means for performing a first determination based on the satisfaction of a first condition and a second determination based on the establishment of a second condition; and a first determination based on the determination result of the first determination by the determination means. A display means for displaying identification information and second identification information based on a determination result of the second determination, and a display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information, respectively. A dynamic display means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, respectively, at a predetermined timing. a display period determining means; and when a variable condition based on dynamically displaying the first identification information is satisfied, the dynamic display period determining means determines in response to the dynamic display of the second identification information. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it has variable control means for varying a dynamic display period.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player There are bonus games that are advantageous. In such a configuration, a gaming machine has been proposed that provides a plurality of types of bonus games by controlling the opening and closing of two ball entrances. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-265765). In such gaming machines, control is only performed to switch the ball entry openings that are opened as bonus games, and the games tend to become monotonous. There was a need to further improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming. Here, in conventional gaming machines, the main interest of the game is varied only by changing the probability of determining whether the game is successful or not, and furthermore, the game tends to be monotonous, and the player's There was a need for a gaming machine that could change the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine I1, the determining means executes the first determination based on the satisfaction of the first condition and the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first determination by the determination means display means for displaying first identification information based on the determination result of the second determination and second identification information based on the determination result of the second determination; A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying each, and a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, respectively, determined at a predetermined timing. dynamic display period determining means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information; and variable control means for varying the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means. Therefore, when the variable condition that is satisfied when the first identification information is displayed is satisfied, the dynamic display period determined for the second identification information is changed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. There is. If second identification information with a short variation time is likely to be selected, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed efficiently. Note that the variable condition here corresponds to a display mode (determination result) in which the first identification information is displayed, a predetermined number of times of dynamic display, and the like.

The gaming machine I1 has a dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods are set, each of which is determined by the dynamic display period determining means, and the dynamic display period group includes the first dynamic display period. 2. A first dynamic display period group in which a first dynamic display period is likely to be selected as the dynamic display period of identification information, and a second dynamic display period group in which a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period is likely to be selected. At least two dynamic display period groups are set, and the variable control means determines the type of the dynamic display period group for which the dynamic display period of the second identification information is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the dynamic display period of the second identification information can be varied by changing and setting the second identification information.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the dynamic display period of the second identification information can be varied by changing the type of the dynamic display period group. The period of identification information can be varied.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, and the second identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that the gaming machine I3 is characterized in that it has a privilege granting means that grants a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the second benefit when the player receives the second benefit.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, and a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is provided when the second identification information is displayed based on the specific determination result. The present invention includes a benefit granting means for granting a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the two major benefits. Therefore, since the dynamic display period determined by the second determination which is advantageous to the player is varied depending on the determination result of the first determination, the player is made interested in the display of the first identification information which is less profitable. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the variable condition is established based on the display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I3, when the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is displayed, the first benefit with fewer benefits than the second benefit is executed; This has the effect of making the player expect the variable condition to be satisfied, and increasing the player's interest.

In the gaming machine I3, the gaming machine I5 is characterized in that the variable condition is established based on the number of dynamic display times of the first identification information being a predetermined number of times or more than a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I3, the number of times the first identification information is dynamically displayed also has the effect of making the player interested and improving the interest in the game. be.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the dynamic display execution means is configured to be able to simultaneously dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and When the first identification information based on the determination result and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result is and terminating means for terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result by displaying the second identification information based on a determination result different from the specific determination result if the display is terminated first. A game machine I6 characterized in that it is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display execution means is configured to be able to simultaneously dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, if the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ends first, the specific and terminating means for terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, if the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short, it is advantageous for the player, and has the effect of making the player expect that the second identification information will be dynamically displayed in a short dynamic display period and play the game. .

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, priority is given to the dynamic display of the identification information set as priority based on predetermined priority conditions for dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information. A game machine I7 characterized in that it has a priority means for executing the game.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information is given priority based on predetermined priority conditions. Since the present invention has a priority means that prioritizes and executes the dynamic display of the set identification information, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and a dynamic display period of the second identification information, respectively; setting means for setting the type of the dynamic display period group for which the dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means, and the setting means is configured to set the type of the dynamic display period group for which the dynamic display period is determined by the variable condition determining means, A gaming machine I8 characterized in that the dynamic display period group corresponding to identification information can be set variably.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and the dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information. a setting means for setting a type of a dynamic display period group for which a target display period is determined; It is configured such that the display period group can be set variably. Therefore, there is an effect that the advantages and disadvantages of the game can be easily varied by the dynamic display period group set by the setting means.

In any of the gaming machines I3 to I8, if the determining means determines a special determination result by the first determination or the second determination, the first benefit and the second benefit may be given to the player. A gaming machine I9 characterized in that an advantageous special benefit is granted by the benefit granting means.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I3 to I8, there is an effect that the player can play the game with the expectation that a special determination result will be obtained.

A gaming machine I10, in any of the gaming machines I3 to I9, wherein the second privilege is set so that the special privilege is granted when a special condition is met.

According to the gaming machine I10, a special benefit is granted when a special condition is satisfied in any of the gaming machines I3 to I9, so that it is possible to further provide advantageous benefits to the player. This has the effect of increasing the attractiveness of the second benefit.

In any of the gaming machines I3 to I10, a variable ball entry means that is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter, and a ball entry means for the variable ball entry means. The variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the specific area where the game ball can enter based on the fulfillment of the passage condition and the second privilege is awarded by the privilege awarding means. a variable control means for changing the state to a first state, and the privilege granting means grants the special privilege when a game ball enters the specific area. I11.

According to the game machine I11, it is possible to make the player expect that the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means will pass through a specific area, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I11, the gaming machine I12 is characterized in that the special privilege is a privilege game that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I11, a bonus game is executed as a special benefit, so that the player's interest can be further improved. Here, when the second benefit is granted, the second identification information may be granted by stopping before the first identification information, so the dynamic display period of the second identification information is short. There is an effect that the player can play the game with interest because the variable control means allows the player to play the game with interest.

The gaming machine I11 includes a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the determination means determines that the result is a special first determination result or a special second determination result, and the special A gaming machine I13 characterized in that the privilege is such that the probability that the determining means determines the special first determination result or the special second determination result is set high until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine I13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I11, as a special benefit, the probability of being determined as a specific first discrimination result or a specific second discrimination result is set to be high, so that the player This has the effect of increasing the value of the second benefit.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H12, and I1 to I13, the gaming machine is a slot machine. The gaming machine Z1 is characterized by the following. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H12, and I1 to I13, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine Z2 is characterized by the following. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C8, D1 to D7, E1 to E7, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H12, and I1 to I13, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine Z3 is characterized by being a combination of a slot machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is advantageous. There are bonus games that are executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a player's interest can be varied by setting a plurality of types of bonus games to be executed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). .
However, there was a need to further improve the interest of the game.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 includes a discriminating means that executes a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first condition, and executes a second discrimination based on the establishment of a second condition. , a display means for displaying first identification information based on the discrimination result of the first discrimination by the discrimination means and second identification information based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the information and the second identification information; and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the information and the second identification information; and variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of information.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, which provides a first benefit that is advantageous to the player when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed. The player has a benefit granting means for granting a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the second benefit when the second identification information based on the determination result is displayed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in which the variable condition is established based on the display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result.
In the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, the variable condition is that the number of times the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed is a predetermined number of times or more than a predetermined number of times. This is established based on the following.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 2 to 4, which can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter. a variable ball entry means, a specific area into which a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means can enter based on the establishment of a passage condition, and the second privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. and variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state based on the above, and the privilege granting means is configured to control the control of the game ball when a game ball enters the specific area. This gives special benefits.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 6 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in which the special benefit is a bonus game that is advantageous to the player.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 7 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in which the determining means determines that the first determination is a specific first determination result or the second determination is a specific second determination result. and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the above, and the special benefit is determined by the determining means as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. The probability is set high until a predetermined condition is met.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 2 to 7, wherein the dynamic display execution means displays the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means. When the first identification information based on the predetermined discrimination result and the second identification information based on the specific discrimination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, the predetermined If the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the determination result is completed first, the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the specific determination result is changed to the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. and terminating means for displaying the second identification information and terminating the process.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the determining means executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition, and executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition, and the determination means. display means for displaying first identification information based on the discrimination result of the first discrimination and second identification information based on the discrimination result of the second discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information; and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information when a variable condition based on the dynamic display of the first identification information is satisfied. and variable control means for varying the dynamic display period in the display. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first identification information based on a predetermined determination result is displayed, a first benefit that is advantageous to the player is given, and when the second identification information based on a specific determination result is displayed, the first benefit is given to the player. The game player has a benefit granting means for granting a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the second benefit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the second identification information based on the specific determination result will be displayed, and there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable condition is established based on the display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the predetermined determination result in which the first benefit is given, which is more disadvantageous than the second benefit.
According to the game described in Technical Idea 4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable condition is established based on the number of dynamic display times of the first identification information or the second identification information being a predetermined number of times or more than a predetermined number of times. Therefore, the number of times the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed can be interesting, and the player's interest can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 2 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, there is a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state where a game ball can enter and a second state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter, and the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means satisfies the passing condition. variable control for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state based on a specific area in which ball entry is possible based on and the second privilege being granted by the privilege granting means; and means, and the benefit granting means grants the special benefit when a game ball enters the specific area. Therefore, when the second benefit is given, the player can enjoy seeing whether or not the game ball passes through a specific area, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 5, the special benefit is the execution of a bonus game that is advantageous to the player. This has the effect of increasing interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, a privilege for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination by the determination means that the first determination is a specific first determination result or the second determination is a specific second determination result. It has a game execution means, and the special privilege is set such that the probability that the particular first determination result or the second determination result is determined by the determination means is high until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, by passing the specific area, the game state can be changed to the player's advantage, and the player can have the effect of being able to feel a sense of accomplishment in being able to change the game state on his or her own.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 8, in addition to the effects provided by any one of Technical Ideas 2 to 7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display execution means is configured to be able to simultaneously dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information on the display means, and the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result. When the information and the second identification information based on the specific determination result are dynamically displayed at the same time, if the dynamic display of the first identification information based on the predetermined determination result ends first, the specific and terminating means for terminating the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the determination result by displaying the second identification information based on the determination result different from the specific determination result. Therefore, it is possible to create interest in the respective dynamic display periods of the first identification information and the second identification information, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game with a fresh feel.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
8 1 Third symbol display device (display means )
114 Display control device (dynamic display means)
S303, S703 Discrimination means

Claims (1)

a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter; a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means;
determining means capable of executing a first determination based on the ball entering the first ball entering means and performing a second determination based on the ball entering the second ball entering means;
first identification information for indicating a first discrimination result that is a discrimination result of the first discrimination by the discrimination means; and second identification information for indicating a second discrimination result that is a discrimination result of the second discrimination. Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying each on the display means;
When first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the display means as the first determination result, a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and as the second determination result a bonus game execution means capable of executing a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game when second identification information indicating a specific second determination result is displayed; In a gaming machine having
specific ball entry means that facilitates the entry of a game ball when the second identification information for indicating that the second discrimination result is the specific second discrimination result is displayed on the display means; ,
a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means can enter;
a benefit granting means that grants advantageous benefits to the player when a game ball enters the specific area;
Storing the execution right of the second discrimination by the discrimination means up to a predetermined number of times based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entry means when the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A storage means capable of
a state setting means capable of switching and setting a first state in which the execution right is more likely to be stored in the storage means and a second state in which the execution right is more difficult to be stored than in the first state;
a delay means capable of delaying the entrance interval of the game ball to an interval equal to or greater than the first interval when the game ball enters the second ball entrance means;
an expectation level indicating an expectation level that the determination result of the second determination will be the specific second determination result when a game ball enters the second ball entry means and a specific condition is satisfied; means capable of displaying information on the display means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game ball is configured to be able to reach the delaying means even when a period in which the game ball can enter the specific ball entering means has arrived. .

Images